Planet Technology Switch SGSW 24040R User Manual
User’s Manual  
WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
24-Port 10/100/1000Mbps  
Layer 2 Managed Switch  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
24-Port 10/100/1000Mbps  
Layer 2 Managed Stackable Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
TABLE OF CONETNTS  
1. INTRODUTION .................................................................................................................... 12  
1.1 Packet Contents .........................................................................................................................................12  
1.2 Product Description...................................................................................................................................12  
1.3 How to Use This Manual............................................................................................................................14  
1.4 Product Features........................................................................................................................................15  
1.5 Product Specification ................................................................................................................................17  
2. INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 19  
2.1 Hardware Description ................................................................................................................................19  
2.1.1 Switch Front Panel ..............................................................................................................................................19  
2.1.2 LED Indications ...................................................................................................................................................21  
2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel...............................................................................................................................................23  
2.2 Install the Switch ........................................................................................................................................26  
2.2.1 Desktop Installation .............................................................................................................................................26  
2.2.2 Rack Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................27  
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver ..............................................................................................................................28  
2.2.4 Connecting DC Power Supply .............................................................................................................................31  
2.3 Stack Installation........................................................................................................................................32  
2.3.1 Connecting Stacking cable ..................................................................................................................................33  
2.3.2 Management Stacking .........................................................................................................................................33  
3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................... 36  
3.1 Requirements..............................................................................................................................................36  
3.2 Management Access Overview.................................................................................................................37  
3.3 Administration Console.............................................................................................................................37  
3.4 Web Management.......................................................................................................................................39  
3.5 SNMP-Based Network Management.........................................................................................................40  
3.6 Protocols.....................................................................................................................................................40  
3.6.1 Virtual Terminal Protocols....................................................................................................................................40  
3.6.2 SNMP Protocol....................................................................................................................................................41  
3.6.3 Management Architecture....................................................................................................................................41  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4. WEB CONFIGURATION...................................................................................................... 42  
4.1 Main WEB PAGE.........................................................................................................................................45  
4.2 System.........................................................................................................................................................47  
4.2.1 System Information..............................................................................................................................................48  
4.2.2 IP Configuration...................................................................................................................................................50  
4.2.3 User Authentication .............................................................................................................................................51  
4.2.4 SNTP Configuration.............................................................................................................................................52  
4.2.5 WEB Firmware Upgrade......................................................................................................................................53  
4.2.6 TFTP Firmware Upgrade.....................................................................................................................................54  
4.2.7 Configuration Save..............................................................................................................................................56  
4.2.8 Configuration Upload...........................................................................................................................................57  
4.2.9 Factory Default ....................................................................................................................................................59  
4.2.10 System Reboot ..................................................................................................................................................60  
4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol....................................................................................................65  
4.3.1 SNMP Overview ..................................................................................................................................................65  
4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration...............................................................................................................................65  
4.3.3 SNMP System Information Configuration ............................................................................................................67  
4.3.4 SNMP Trap Configuration....................................................................................................................................67  
4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration ........................................................................................................................................69  
4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration ...........................................................................................................69  
4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration......................................................................................................70  
4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration...............................................................................................................71  
4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Users Configuration.................................................................................................................72  
4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Views Configuration.................................................................................................................73  
4.4 Port Management .......................................................................................................................................77  
4.4.1 Port Configuration................................................................................................................................................77  
4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview.......................................................................................................................................79  
4.4.3 Detailed Port Statistics.........................................................................................................................................80  
4.4.4 Port Mirroring Configuration.................................................................................................................................82  
4.5 Link Aggregation........................................................................................................................................85  
4.5.1 Static Aggregation Configuration .........................................................................................................................87  
Hash Code Contributors........................................................................................................................................87  
Static Aggregation Group Configuration ................................................................................................................87  
4.5.2 LACP Configuration.............................................................................................................................................89  
4.5.3 LACP System Status ...........................................................................................................................................90  
4.5.4 LACP Port Status.................................................................................................................................................90  
4.5.5 LACP statistics.....................................................................................................................................................92  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6 VLAN............................................................................................................................................................93  
4.6.1 VLAN Overview ...................................................................................................................................................93  
4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN .............................................................................................................................................94  
4.6.3 VLAN Basic Information.......................................................................................................................................98  
4.6.4 VLAN Port Configuration .....................................................................................................................................99  
4.6.5 VLAN Membership Configuration ......................................................................................................................102  
4.6.6 Private VLAN Configuration...............................................................................................................................103  
4.7 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol................................................................................................................105  
4.7.1 RSTP System Configuration.............................................................................................................................. 111  
4.7.2 RSTP Bridge Status...........................................................................................................................................112  
4.7.3 RSTP Port Configuration ...................................................................................................................................113  
4.7.4 RSTP Port Status...............................................................................................................................................116  
4.7.5 RSTP Port Statistics ..........................................................................................................................................117  
4.8 Quality of Service.....................................................................................................................................118  
4.8.1 Understand QOS...............................................................................................................................................118  
4.8.2 QoS Control List Configuration..........................................................................................................................119  
4.8.2.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration .............................................................................................................120  
4.8.3 Port QoS Configuration......................................................................................................................................121  
4.8.4 QCL Configuration Wizard.................................................................................................................................123  
4.8.4.1 Set up Policy Rules...............................................................................................................................123  
4.8.4.2 Set up Typical Network Application Rules.............................................................................................125  
4.8.4.3 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping..........................................................................................................127  
4.8.4.4 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping........................................................................................................128  
4.8.5 QoS Statistics ....................................................................................................................................................129  
4.8.6 Bandwidth Control .............................................................................................................................................130  
4.8.7 Storm Control Configuration ..............................................................................................................................131  
4.9 Multicast....................................................................................................................................................132  
4.9.1 IGMP Snooping .................................................................................................................................................132  
4.9.2 IGMP Snooping Configuration...........................................................................................................................136  
4.9.3 IGMP Port Related Configuration ......................................................................................................................137  
4.9.4 IGMP Snooping Status ......................................................................................................................................138  
4.9.5 Multicast Address Table.....................................................................................................................................139  
4.10 IEEE 802.1X Network Access Control ..................................................................................................140  
4.10.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Authentication..................................................................................141  
4.10.2 802.1X System Configuration..........................................................................................................................144  
4.10.3 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication Port Configuration.............................................................................146  
4.10.4 802.1X Port Status...........................................................................................................................................149  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.5 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication Statistics ...........................................................................................150  
4.10.6 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration ...........................................................................................154  
4.10.7 802.1X Client Configuration.............................................................................................................................156  
4.11 Access Control Lists..............................................................................................................................159  
4.11.1 Access Control List Configuration ....................................................................................................................159  
4.11.2 ACE Configuration ...........................................................................................................................................161  
4.11.3 ACL Configuration wizard.................................................................................................................................168  
4.11.3.1 Set up Policy Rules.............................................................................................................................169  
4.11.3.2 Set up Port Policies.............................................................................................................................170  
4.11.3.3 Set up Typical Network Application Rules ...........................................................................................171  
4.11.3.4 Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding........................................................................................174  
4.11.3.5 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules.....................................................................................................175  
4.11.3.6 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules.....................................................................................................176  
4.11.4 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration........................................................................................................................178  
4.11.5 ACL Ports Configuration...................................................................................................................................179  
4.12 Address Table.........................................................................................................................................181  
4.12.1 MAC Address Table Configuration...................................................................................................................181  
4.12.2 Static MAC Table Configuration .......................................................................................................................182  
4.12.3 MAC Address Table Status ..............................................................................................................................183  
MAC Table Columns............................................................................................................................................183  
4.13 Port Security...........................................................................................................................................185  
4.14 LLDP ........................................................................................................................................................187  
4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol .........................................................................................................................187  
4.14.2 LLDP Configuration .........................................................................................................................................188  
4.14.3 LLDP Neighbor ................................................................................................................................................191  
4.14.4 LLDP Statistics.................................................................................................................................................192  
4.15 Network Diagnastics..............................................................................................................................194  
4.15.1 Cable Diagnostics............................................................................................................................................194  
4.15.2 Ping .................................................................................................................................................................195  
4.16 Stacking...................................................................................................................................................196  
4.16.1 Stack................................................................................................................................................................198  
4.16.1.1 Switch IDs...........................................................................................................................................198  
4.16.1.2 Master Election ...................................................................................................................................199  
4.16.1.3 Stack Redundancy..............................................................................................................................199  
4.16.1.4 Shortest Path Forwarding ...................................................................................................................200  
4.16.2 Stack Configuration .........................................................................................................................................201  
4.16.3 Stack Information.............................................................................................................................................202  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16.4 Stack Port State Ovewview..............................................................................................................................204  
4.16.5 Stack Example.................................................................................................................................................205  
5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE.......................................................................................... 208  
5.1 Accessing the CLI ....................................................................................................................................208  
Logon to the Console ..........................................................................................................................................208  
Configure IP address...........................................................................................................................................209  
5.2 Telnet login................................................................................................................................................211  
6. Command Line Mode....................................................................................................... 212  
6.1 System Command....................................................................................................................................212  
System Configuration..........................................................................................................................................212  
System Reboot....................................................................................................................................................213  
System Restore Default.......................................................................................................................................213  
System Name......................................................................................................................................................214  
System Prompt....................................................................................................................................................214  
System Password................................................................................................................................................215  
System SNTP......................................................................................................................................................215  
System Timezone................................................................................................................................................216  
System Firmware Load........................................................................................................................................216  
IP Configuration...................................................................................................................................................218  
IP DHCP..............................................................................................................................................................218  
IP Setup...............................................................................................................................................................219  
IP Ping.................................................................................................................................................................219  
6.2 Port Management Command...................................................................................................................221  
Port Configuration ...............................................................................................................................................221  
Port State.............................................................................................................................................................221  
Port Mode............................................................................................................................................................222  
Port Flow Control.................................................................................................................................................222  
Port Maximum Frame..........................................................................................................................................223  
Port Power...........................................................................................................................................................224  
Port Excessive.....................................................................................................................................................224  
Port Statistics.......................................................................................................................................................225  
Port VeriPHY .......................................................................................................................................................225  
Port Numbers ......................................................................................................................................................226  
Mirror Configuration.............................................................................................................................................227  
Mirror Port ...........................................................................................................................................................227  
Mirror SID............................................................................................................................................................227  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Mirror Mode.........................................................................................................................................................228  
6.3 Link Aggregation Command ...................................................................................................................229  
Aggregation Configuration...................................................................................................................................229  
Aggregation Add..................................................................................................................................................229  
Aggregation Delete..............................................................................................................................................230  
Aggregation Lookup ............................................................................................................................................230  
Aggregation Mode...............................................................................................................................................231  
LACP Configuration.............................................................................................................................................232  
LACP Mode.........................................................................................................................................................233  
LACP Key............................................................................................................................................................233  
LACP Role...........................................................................................................................................................234  
LACP Status........................................................................................................................................................234  
LACP Statistics....................................................................................................................................................235  
6.4 VLAN Configuration Command ..............................................................................................................237  
VLAN Configuration.............................................................................................................................................237  
VLAN Mode.........................................................................................................................................................237  
VLAV PVID..........................................................................................................................................................238  
VLAN Frame Type...............................................................................................................................................238  
VLAN Ingress Filter .............................................................................................................................................239  
VLAN Link Type...................................................................................................................................................239  
VLAN Q-in-Q Mode .............................................................................................................................................240  
VLAN Ethernet Type............................................................................................................................................240  
VLAN Add............................................................................................................................................................241  
VLAN Delete........................................................................................................................................................241  
VLAN Lookup ......................................................................................................................................................242  
PVLAN Configuration ..........................................................................................................................................243  
PVLAN Isolate.....................................................................................................................................................243  
6.5 Spanning Tree Protocol Command ........................................................................................................244  
RSTP Configuration.............................................................................................................................................244  
RSTP SysPrio .....................................................................................................................................................244  
RSTP Age............................................................................................................................................................245  
RSTP Delay.........................................................................................................................................................245  
RSTP Version......................................................................................................................................................246  
RSTP Mode.........................................................................................................................................................246  
RSTP Cost ..........................................................................................................................................................247  
RSTP Priority.......................................................................................................................................................247  
RSTP Edge .........................................................................................................................................................248  
RSTP P2P...........................................................................................................................................................248  
RSTP Status........................................................................................................................................................249  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
RSTP Statistics....................................................................................................................................................250  
RSTP mCheck.....................................................................................................................................................250  
6.6 Multicast Configuration Command ........................................................................................................251  
IGMP Configuration.............................................................................................................................................251  
IGMP Mode .........................................................................................................................................................251  
IGMP State..........................................................................................................................................................252  
IGMP State..........................................................................................................................................................252  
IGMP Querier ......................................................................................................................................................253  
IGMP Fast Leave.................................................................................................................................................253  
IGMP Router .......................................................................................................................................................254  
IGMP Flooding ....................................................................................................................................................255  
IGMP Groups.......................................................................................................................................................255  
IGMP Status ........................................................................................................................................................255  
6.7 Quality of Service Command ..................................................................................................................257  
QoS Configuration...............................................................................................................................................257  
QoS Classes .......................................................................................................................................................257  
QoS Default.........................................................................................................................................................257  
QoS Tag Priority ..................................................................................................................................................258  
QoS QCL Port .....................................................................................................................................................258  
QoS QCL Add......................................................................................................................................................259  
QoS QCL Delete..................................................................................................................................................260  
QoS QCL Lookup ................................................................................................................................................260  
QoS Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................261  
QoS Weight.........................................................................................................................................................261  
QoS Rate Limiter.................................................................................................................................................261  
QoS Shaper.........................................................................................................................................................262  
QoS Unicast ........................................................................................................................................................263  
QoS Multicast......................................................................................................................................................263  
QoS Broadcast....................................................................................................................................................264  
6.8 802.1x Port Access Control Command ..................................................................................................265  
Dot1x Configuration.............................................................................................................................................265  
Dotx1 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................265  
Dot1x Status........................................................................................................................................................266  
Dot1x Server .......................................................................................................................................................266  
Dot1x Secret........................................................................................................................................................267  
Dot1x Authenticate ..............................................................................................................................................267  
Dot1x Re-authentication......................................................................................................................................268  
Dot1x Period........................................................................................................................................................268  
Dot1x Timeout .....................................................................................................................................................269  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Dot1x Statistics....................................................................................................................................................269  
Dot1x Clients.......................................................................................................................................................270  
Dot1x Agetime.....................................................................................................................................................270  
Dot1x Holdtime....................................................................................................................................................271  
6.9 Access Control List Command...............................................................................................................272  
ACL Configuration ...............................................................................................................................................272  
ACL Action...........................................................................................................................................................272  
ACL Policy...........................................................................................................................................................273  
ACL Rate.............................................................................................................................................................273  
ACL Add ..............................................................................................................................................................274  
ACL Delete ..........................................................................................................................................................275  
ACL Lookup.........................................................................................................................................................276  
ACL Lookup.........................................................................................................................................................276  
6.10 MAC Address Table Command.............................................................................................................277  
MAC Configuration..............................................................................................................................................277  
Mac Add ..............................................................................................................................................................277  
MAC Delete.........................................................................................................................................................278  
MAC Lookup........................................................................................................................................................278  
MAC Age Time ....................................................................................................................................................279  
MAC Learning .....................................................................................................................................................279  
MAC Dump..........................................................................................................................................................280  
MAC Statistics .....................................................................................................................................................280  
MAC Flash...........................................................................................................................................................281  
6.11 LLDP Command......................................................................................................................................282  
LLDP Configuration .............................................................................................................................................282  
LLDP Mode .........................................................................................................................................................282  
LLDP Optional TLV..............................................................................................................................................283  
LLDP Interval.......................................................................................................................................................283  
LLDP Hold...........................................................................................................................................................284  
LLDP Delay .........................................................................................................................................................284  
LLDP Reinit .........................................................................................................................................................285  
LLDP Information ................................................................................................................................................285  
LLDP Statistics ....................................................................................................................................................286  
6.12 Stack Management Command ..............................................................................................................287  
Stack List.............................................................................................................................................................287  
Stack List.............................................................................................................................................................287  
Stack Master Reelect...........................................................................................................................................287  
Stack Select.........................................................................................................................................................288  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Stack SID Swap...................................................................................................................................................288  
Stack SID Delect .................................................................................................................................................288  
Stack SID Asign...................................................................................................................................................289  
7. SWITCH OPERATION....................................................................................................... 290  
7.1 Address Table...........................................................................................................................................290  
7.2 Learning ....................................................................................................................................................290  
7.3 Forwarding & Filtering.............................................................................................................................290  
7.4 Store-and-Forward ...................................................................................................................................290  
7.5 Auto-Negotiation ......................................................................................................................................291  
8. TROUBLE SHOOTING...................................................................................................... 293  
APPENDEX A........................................................................................................................ 295  
A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments ...........................................................................................................295  
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100Base-TX...................................................................................................................295  
APPENDEX B : GLOSSARY................................................................................................. 297  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
1. INTRODUTION  
The PLANET Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series - WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R / SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R are all  
multiple ports Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features; the description of  
these models as below:  
WGSW-24040  
WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040  
:
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch  
:
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch / Redundant Power  
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch  
:
SGSW-24040R :  
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Stackable Switch / Redundant Power  
Terms of “Managed Switch” means the Switches mentioned titled in the cover page of this User’s manual, i.e.WGSW-24040  
and SGSW-24040.  
1.1 Packet Contents  
Open the box of the Managed Switch and carefully unpack it. The box should contain the following items:  
Check the contents of your package for following parts:  
; The Managed Switch  
; User’s manual CD  
; Quick installation guide  
; 19” Rack mount accessory kit  
; Power cord  
x1  
x1  
x1  
x1  
x1  
X4  
; Rubber feet  
; RS-232 DB9 male Console cable x1  
; CB-STX50 – 50cm stack cable  
x1  
(SGSW-24040/24040R only)  
If any of these are missing or damaged, please contact your dealer immediately, if possible, retain the carton including the  
original packing material, and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair.  
1.2 Product Description  
High-Performance / Cost-effective / Telecom class Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data  
Center Networking  
The PLANET Managed Switch is a L2/L4 Managed Gigabit Switch. Since Gigabit network interface had become the basic  
equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers, with 48Gbps switching fabric, the MANAGED SWITCH can  
handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers. The powerful  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
QoS and Network Security features make it to meets the needs of effective data traffic control for both Campus and Enterprise,  
such VoIP, video streaming and multicast application.  
High Performance  
The Managed Switch provides 24 10/100/1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots. It boasts a high  
performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non-blocking switch fabric and wire-speed throughput as high as  
48Gbps, which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increase bandwidth demands.  
Robust Layer 2 Features  
The Managed can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configuration, Port aggregation,  
VLAN, Spanning Tree protocol, QoS, bandwidth control and IGMP Snooping. The WGSW-24040 provides 802.1Q Tagged  
VLAN, Q-in-Q VLAN trunning and private VLAN, the VLAN groups allowed on the WGSW-24040 will be maximally up to 4k.  
Via supporting port aggregation, the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high-speed trunk combining multiple ports, up  
to eight groups of maximum to 8-ports for trunking, and it supports fail-over as well.  
Excellent Traffic Control  
PLANET WGSW-24040 is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by  
telecoms. The functionality includes QoS features such as wire-speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that  
are particular useful for multi-tenant unit, multi business unit, Telco, or Network Service Provide applications. It also  
empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at  
VoIP and Video conferencing transmission.  
Efficient Management  
For efficient management, the series of Managed Switch is equipped with console, WEB and SNMP management interfaces.  
With its built-in Web-based management, it offers an easy-to-use, platform-independent management and configuration  
facility. The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and can be managed via any  
standard-based management software. For text-based management, it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port.  
Powerful Security  
The Managed Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List (ACL) for enforcing security to the edge. Its protection  
mechanisms also comprise of port-based 802.1x and MAC-based user and device authentication. The port-security is  
effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through, so that network administrators can now construct highly secured  
corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before.  
Flexibility and Extension solution  
The 4 mini-GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base-SX/LX and WDM SFP(Small Factor Pluggable) fiber-optic modules. The  
distance can be extended from 550 meters (Multi-Mode fiber) up to above 10/50/70/120 kilometers (Single-Mode fiber or  
WDM fiber). They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Reliability Stacking Management  
The SGSW Series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP  
address. That helps network managers to easily configure switches via one single IP address instead of connecting and  
setting each unit one by one. Through its high bandwidth tunnel and stacking technology, it gives enterprise, service  
provider and telcom flexible control over port density, uplinks and switch stack performance. Up to 384 Gigabit  
Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed. The stacking  
technology also enables the advantages of chassis-based switches to be integrated into SGSW Series Managed  
Switch, but without the expensive up-front cost.  
AC / DC Power Redundant to ensure continuous operation  
The R series Managed Switch equip with one 100~240V AC power supply unit and one DC -48V power supply unit on its  
standard package, it provides redundant power supply installation. A redundant power system is also provided to enhance the  
reliability with either 100~240V AC power supply unit or DC -48V power supply unit. The continuous power systems are  
specifically designed to handle the demands of high tech facilities requiring the highest power integrity available.  
1.3 How to Use This Manual  
This User Manual is structured as follows:  
Section 2, INSTALLATION  
The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch.  
Section 3, SWITCH MANAGEMENT  
The section contains the information about the software function of the Managed Switch.  
Section 4, WEB CONFIGURATION  
The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface.  
Section 5, COMMAND LINE INTERFACE  
The section describes how to use the Command Line interface (CLI).  
Section 6, CLI CONFIGURATION  
The section explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line interface.  
Section 7, SWITCH OPERATION  
The chapter explains how to does the switch operation of the Managed Switch.  
Section 8, TROUBSHOOTING  
The chapter explains how to trouble shooting of the Managed Switch.  
Appendix A  
The section contains cable information of the Managed Switch.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
1.4 Product Features  
¾
Physical Port  
WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45  
4 mini-GBIC/SFP slots, shared with Port-21 to Port-24  
RS-232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
24-Port 10/100/1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45  
4 mini-GBIC/SFP slots, shared with Port-21 to Port-24  
RS-232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup  
2 High-performance 5GbE Stacking interface  
¾
Layer 2 Features  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Complies with the IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE 802.3ab, IEEE 802.3z Gigabit Ethernet standard  
Supports Auto-negotiation and half duplex/full duplex modes for all 10Base-T/100Base-TX and 1000Base-T ports.  
Auto-MDI/MDI-X detection for each RJ-45 port  
Prevents packet loss with back pressure (Half-Duplex) and IEEE 802.3x PAUSE frame flow control (Full-Duplex)  
High performance of Store-and-Forward architecture, broadcast storm control and runt/CRC filtering eliminates  
erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
8K MAC address table, automatic source address learning and ageing  
1392Kbytes embedded memory for packet buffers  
Support VLAN  
− IEEE 802.1Q Tagged VLAN  
− Up to 4041 VLANs groups, out of 4041 VLAN IDs  
− Provider Bridging (VLAN Q-in-Q) support (IEEE 802.1ad)  
− Private VLAN Edge (PVE)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Support Spanning Tree Protocol  
− STP, IEEE 802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol)  
− RSTP, IEEE 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)  
Support Link Aggregation  
− 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)  
− Cisco ether-channel (Static Trunk)  
− Maximum 8 trunk groups, up to 8 ports per trunk group  
− Up to 16Gbps bandwidth(Duplex Mode)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Provide Port Mirror (many-to-1)  
Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
¾
Quality of Service  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
4 priority queues on all switch ports.  
Supports for strict priority and weighted round robin (WRR) CoS policies  
Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control  
Traffic-policing policies on the switch port  
¾
¾
Multicast  
ꢀ
ꢀ
Supports IGMP Snooping v1, v2 and v3  
Querier mode support  
Security  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
IEEE 802.1x Port-Based / MAC-Based network access authentication  
IP-Based Access Control List (ACL)  
MAC-Based Access Control List  
Port Security  
¾
Management  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
WEB-based, Telnet, Console Command Line management  
Accesses through SNMPv1, v2c and v3 security set and get requests.  
Built-in Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) client  
BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment  
Firmware upload/download via HTTP / TFTP  
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)  
LLDP Protocol  
¾
Stacking  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Hardware stack up to 16 units and 384 ports  
Stacking architecture supports Chain and Ring mode  
Mirror across stack  
Link Aggregation groups spanning multiple switches in a stack  
Hardware learning with MAC table synchronization across stack  
¾
Redundant Power System (WGSW-24040R / SGSW-24040R)  
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
100~240V AC / 48V DC Dual power redundant  
Active-active redundant power failure protection  
Backup of catastrophic power failure on one supply  
Fault tolerance and resilience.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
1.5 Product Specification  
Product  
WGSW-24040  
WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040  
SGSW-24040R  
Hardware Specification  
Copper Ports  
24 10/ 100/1000Base-T RJ-45 Auto-MDI/MDI-X ports  
4 SFP interfaces, shared with Port-21 to Port-24  
SFP/mini-GBIC Slots  
Stacking Ports  
---  
48Gbps / non-blocking  
8K entries  
2 5GbE / Cross-HDMI interface  
68Gbps  
Switch Fabric  
Address Table  
Share data Buffer  
Switch Processing Scheme  
1392 kilobytes  
Store-and-Forward  
IEEE 802.3x Pause Frame for Full-Duplex  
Back pressure for Half-Duplex  
Flow Control  
Jumbo Frame  
LED  
10Kbytes  
Power, Link/Act and speed per Gigabit  
port  
Power, Stack Master, Stack Port LNK,  
Link/Act and speed per Gigabit port  
Max. 30.2 watts /  
102.98 BTU  
Max. 30.2 watts /  
102.98 BTU  
Max. 30 watts /  
102 BTU  
Max. 30 watts /  
102 BTU  
Power Consumption  
AC 100~240V,  
50/60Hz  
AC : 100~240V,  
50/60Hz  
AC 100~240V,  
50/60Hz  
AC : 100~240V,  
50/60Hz  
Power Requirement – AC  
Power Requirement – DC  
-48V DC @ 0.6A  
Range: -30 ~ -60V  
-48V DC @ 0.6A  
Range: -30 ~ -60V  
---  
---  
Stacking Numbers  
Stacking Bandwidth  
Stack ID Display  
---  
16  
10Gbps Full-Duplex  
7-Segment LED Display (1~9, A~F,0)  
---  
---  
Layer 2 function  
System Configuration  
Console, Telnet, Web Browser, SNMPv1, v2c and v3  
Port disable/enable.  
Auto-negotiation 10/100/1000Mbps full and half duplex mode selection.  
Flow Control disable / enable.  
Port configuration  
Bandwidth control on each port.  
Display each port’s speed duplex mode, link status, Flow control status. Auto  
negotiation status, trunk status.  
Port Status  
VLAN  
802.1Q Tagged Based VLAN ,up to 4K VLAN groups  
Q-in-Q  
Private VLAN  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IEEE 802.3ad LACP / Static Trunk  
Port trunking  
Support 8 groups of 8-Port trunk support  
Traffic classification based, Strict priority and WRR  
4-level priority for switching  
- Port Number  
QoS  
- 802.1p priority  
- DS/TOS field in IP Packet  
IGMP (v1/v2) Snooping, up to 8K multicast Groups  
IGMP Querier mode support  
IGMP Snooping  
IP-Based ACL / MAC-Based ACL  
Up to 256 entries  
Access Control List  
RFC-1213 MIB-II  
IF-MIB  
RFC-1493 Bridge MIB  
RFC-1643 Ethernet MIB  
RFC-2863 Interface MIB  
RFC-2665 Ether-Like MIB  
RFC-2737 Entity MIB  
RFC-2618 RADIUS Client MIB  
RFC-2933 IGMP-STD-MIB ()  
RFC3411 SNMP-Frameworks-MIB  
IEEE802.1X PAE  
SNMP MIBs  
LLDP  
MAU-MIB  
Standards Conformance  
Regulation Compliance  
FCC Part 15 Class A, CE  
IEEE 802.3 10Base-T  
IEEE 802.3u 100Base-TX/100BASE-FX  
IEEE 802.3z Gigabit SX/LX  
IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit 1000T  
IEEE 802.3x Flow Control and Back pressure  
IEEE 802.3ad Port trunk with LACP  
IEEE 802.1d Spanning tree protocol  
IEEE 802.1w Rapid spanning tree protocol  
IEEE 802.1p Class of service  
Standards Compliance  
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Tagging  
IEEE 802.1x Port Authentication Network Control  
IEEE 802.1ab LLDP  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2. INSTALLATION  
This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount. For easier  
management and control of the Managed Switch, familiarize yourself with its display indicators, and ports. Front panel  
illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators. Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch, please  
read this chapter completely.  
2.1 Hardware Description  
2.1.1 Switch Front Panel  
The unit front panel provides a simple interface monitoring the switch. Figure 2-1 and 2-2 shows the front panel of the Managed  
Switches.  
WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040RFront Panel  
Figure 2-1 WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R front panel.  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R Front Panel  
Figure 2-2 SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R front panel.  
■
■
Gigabit TP interface  
10/100/1000Base-T Copper, RJ-45 Twist-Pair: Up to 100 meters.  
Gigabit SFP slots  
1000Base-SX/LX mini-GBIC slot, SFP (Small Factor Pluggable) transceiver module: From 550 meters (Multi-mode fiber),  
up to 10/30/50/70/120 kilometers (Single-mode fiber).  
■
Console Port  
The console port is a DB9, RS-232 male seria port connector. It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly. Through  
the console port, it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting, factory reset, port management, link  
status and system setting. Users can use the attached RS-232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the  
device. After the connection, users an run any terminal emulation program (Hyper Terminal, ProComm Plus, Telix, Winterm  
and so on) to enter the statup screen of the device.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
■
Reset button  
At the left of front panel, the reset button is designed for reboot the Managed Switch without turn off and on the power. The  
following is the summary table of Reset button functions:  
Reset Button Pressed and Released  
Function  
About 1~3 second  
Reboot the Managed Switch  
Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration.  
The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default  
settings as below:  
Until the PWR LED lit off  
。
。
。
。
Default Password: admin  
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254  
■
Stack ID  
SGSW-24040 and SGSW-24040R only  
Each SGSW Managed Stackable Switch on a stack must have a unique “Stack ID”. There are 16 degrees (0~9, A~F) in the  
rotary switch. The Stack ID is configured via Web or CLI management interface. Use the Stack ID to identify the localtion of  
the real device.  
Stack ID is not equals to the Master Priority that configured in the management interface.  
■
Master LED  
SGSW-24040 and SGSW-24040R only  
If master switch is fail or disconnected to the switch by stack port, the switch with least switch ID will become master.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.1.2 LED Indications  
The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links, data activity, system operation, Stack status and system power, helps  
monitor and troubleshoot when needed.  
WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R LED indication  
Figure 2-3 WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R LED panel  
■
System  
LED  
Color  
Green  
Function  
Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on.  
PWR  
Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure.  
■
10/100/1000Base-T interfaces  
LED  
Color  
Function  
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed  
1000Mbps  
Blink: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.  
1000  
Green  
LNK/ACT  
Off:  
If L10/100 NK/ACT LED light-> indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or  
100Mbps  
If LNK/ACT LED Off -> indicate that the port is link down  
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed  
10Mbps or 100Mbps  
10/100  
Blink: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.  
Orange  
LNK/ACT  
Off:  
If 1000 LNK/ACT LED light-> indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps  
If 1000 LNK/ACT LED Off -> indicate that the port is link down  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
■
1000Base-SX/LX SFP interfaces (Shared Port-21~Port-24)  
LED  
Color  
Function  
Lights: To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with  
1000  
LNK  
speed 1000Mbps  
Green  
Off:  
To indicate that the SFP port is link down  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R LED indication  
Figure 2-4 SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R LED panel  
■
System  
LED  
Color  
Function  
Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on.  
PWR  
Green  
Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure.  
Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group  
Master  
STX1  
STX2  
Green  
Green  
Green  
Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established.  
Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established.  
■
10/100/1000Base-T interfaces  
LED  
Color  
Function  
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed  
1000Mbps  
Blink: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.  
1000  
Green  
LNK/ACT  
Off:  
If L10/100 NK/ACT LED light-> indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or  
100Mbps  
If LNK/ACT LED Off -> indicate that the port is link down  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Lights: To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed  
10Mbps or 100Mbps  
10/100  
Blink: To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port.  
Orange  
LNK/ACT  
Off:  
If 1000 LNK/ACT LED light-> indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps  
If 1000 LNK/ACT LED Off -> indicate that the port is link down  
■
1000Base-SX/LX SFP interfaces (Shared Port-21~Port-24)  
LED  
Color  
Function  
Lights: To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with  
1000  
LNK  
speed 1000Mbps  
Green  
Off:  
To indicate that the SFP port is link down  
■
7-Segment LED Display  
Stack ID (1~9, A~F, 0): To indicate the Switch ID of each SGSW Managed Switch. Switch IDs are used to uniquely identify  
the Managed Switches within a stack. The Switch ID of each Managed Switch is shown on the display on the front of the  
Managed Switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands of the Stack group.  
Stack ID  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
A.  
B.  
11  
C.  
D.  
E.  
F.  
0
Switch ID  
10  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
2.1.3 Switch Rear Panel  
The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket, which accept input power from 100 to 240V AC,  
50-60Hz. Figure 2-5 to Figure 2-8 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches  
WGSW-24040 Rear Panel  
Figure 2-5 Rear panel of WGSW-24040  
WGSW-24040R Rear Panel  
Figure 2-6 Rear panel of WGSW-24040R  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 Rear Panel  
Figure 2-7 Rear panel of SGSW-24040  
SGSW-24040R Rear Panel  
Figure 2-8 Rear panel of SGSW-24040R  
■
AC Power Receptacle  
For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world, the Managed Switch’s power supply automatically adjusts  
to line power in the range 100-240VAC and 50/60 Hz.  
Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptalbe on the rear panel of the Managed Switch. Plug the other  
end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready.  
The device is a power-required device, it means, it will not work till it is powered. If your networks should  
active all the time, please consider using UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) for your device. It will  
prevent you from network data loss or network downtime.  
Power Notice:  
In some area, installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your Managed Switch from  
being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter.  
■
Stack ports  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
There are two High-Performance stack ports on the rear panel. One is STX1 / Cascade Down and the other is STX2 /  
Cascade UP.  
• When stacked, the STX1 / Cascade Down port should connect to the other switch’s STX2 / Cascade UP port and the  
STX2 / Cascade UP port should connect to other switch’s STX1 / Cascade Down out.  
• You can just use attached PLANET CB-STX50 or longer stack cable CB-STX200 connector to stack.  
• The CB-STX50 and CB-STX200 are Cross-Overed HDMI cables, only attached PLANET stack cable can be used.  
• Plug-and-play connection.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 2-9 SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R Stack Ports  
■
DC Power Connector  
The rear panel of the WGSW-24040R and SGSW-24040R contains a power switch and a DC power connector, which  
accepts DC power input voltage from -30V to -60V DC. Connect the power cable to the Managed Switch at the input  
terminal block. The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3.5.  
Figure 2-10 Rear Panel of WGSW-24040R / SGSW-24040R  
Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of WGSW-24040R or SGSW-24040R,  
Warning:  
ensure that the power switch in the “OFF” position and the DC power is OFF  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.2 Install the Switch  
This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections to the Managed Switch. Please read the  
following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented. To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf,  
simply complete the following steps.  
2.2.1 Desktop Installation  
To install the Managed Switch on desktop or shelf, please follows these steps:  
Step1: Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch.  
Step2: Place the Managed Switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source, as shown in Figure 2-10.  
Figure 2-10 Place the Managed Switch on the desktop  
Step3: Keep enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and the surrounding objects.  
When choosing a location, please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter  
1, Section 4, and Specification.  
Step4: Connect the Managed Switch to network devices.  
Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10/100/1000 RJ-45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch  
Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers, workstations or routers…etc.  
Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ-45 tips. For  
more information, please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Step5: Supply power to the Managed Switch.  
Connect one end of the power cable to the Managed Switch.  
Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet.  
When the Managed Switch receives power, the Power LED should remain solid Green.  
2.2.2 Rack Mounting  
To install the Managed Switch in a 19-inch standard rack, please follows the instructions described below.  
Step1: Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface, with the front panel positioned towards the front side.  
Step2: Attach the rack-mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch with supplied screws attached to the package.  
Figure 2-11 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch.  
Figure 2-11 Attach brackets to the Managed Switch.  
You must use the screws supplied with the mounting brackets. Damage caused to the parts by  
using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty.  
Step3: Secure the brackets tightly.  
Step4: Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side.  
Step5: After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch, use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack,  
as shown in Figure 2-12.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 2-12 Mounting SGSW-2840 in a Rack  
Step6: Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2.2.1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply  
power to the Managed Switch.  
2.2.3 Installing the SFP transceiver  
The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot.  
The SFP transceivers are hot-pluggable and hot-swappable. You can plug-in and out the transceiver to/from any SFP port  
without having to power down the Managed Switch. As the Figure 2-13 appears.  
Figure 2-13 Plug-in the SFP transceiver  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers  
PLANET Managed Switch supports both Single mode and Multi-mode SFP transceiver. The following list of approved PLANET  
SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication:  
■ MGB-SX SFP (1000BASE-SX SFP transceiver / Multi-mode / 850nm / 220m~550m)  
■ MGB-LX SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / Single mode / 1310nm / 10km)  
■ MGB-L30 SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / Single mode / 1310nm / 30km)  
■ MGB-L50 SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / Single mode / 1310nm / 50km)  
■ MGB-LA10 SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / WDM Single mode / TX: 1310nm, RX: 1550nm/ 10km)  
■ MGB-LB10 SFP (1000BASE-LX SFP transceiver / WDM Single mode / TX: 1550nm, RX: 1310nm / 10km)  
It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Managed Switch. If you insert a SFP transceiver that is  
not supported, the Managed Switch will not recognize it.  
Before connect the other Managed Switches, workstation or Media Converter.  
1.  
Make sure both side of the SFP transceiver are with the same media type, for example: 1000Base-SX to 1000Base-SX,  
1000Bas-LX to 1000Base-LX.  
2.  
Check the fiber-optic cable type match the SFP transceiver model.  
¾
¾
To connect to 1000Base-SX SFP transceiver, use the Multi-mode fiber cable- with one side must be male duplex LC  
connector type.  
To connect to 1000Base-LX SFP transceiver, use the Single-mode fiber cable-with one side must be male duplex LC  
connector type.  
„
1.  
2.  
Connect the fiber cable  
Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver.  
Connect the other end of the cable to a device – switches with SFP installed, fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media  
Converter..  
3.  
4.  
Check the LNK/ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Managed Switch. Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating  
correctly.  
Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed. Co works with some fiber-NICs or Media Converters, set the Link  
mode to “1000 Force” is needed.  
„
Remove the transceiver module  
1.  
Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator. Or through the management  
interface of the switch/converter (if available) to disable the port in advance.  
Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal.  
Pull out the module gently through the handle.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 2-14 Pull out the SFP transceiver  
Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module. Direct pull  
out the module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed  
Switch.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.2.4 Connecting DC Power Supply – WGSW-24040R / SGSW-24040R  
The WGSW-24040R and SGSW-24040R support -48VDC power input, connect the power cable to the switch at the input  
terminal block.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
The size of the two screws in the terminal block is M3.5.  
The terminals are marked “-48V”, “FG“.  
Loosen the two screws so you can slide the DC cable beneath it. Insert the DC cable into the connector first, and screw it  
down tight.  
4.  
Connect the power cable to the DC power supply. After power up or reset, the Managed Switch performs a cold start  
procedure.  
Figure 2-15 -48VDC connector  
Before connect the DC power cable to the input terminal block of Managed Switch, ensure that the  
Warning:  
power switch in the “OFF” position and the DC power is OFF  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.3 Stack Installation  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The SGSW-24040 series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP  
address. And up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as  
needed. You can add SGSW-24040 series switches as needed to support more network clients, knowing that your switching  
fabric will scale to meet increasing traffic demands.  
Two types of stack topologies are supported by the SGSW-24040 series:  
„
„
Chain topology (same as a disconnected ring)  
Ring topology  
Please find the following picture for sample connection.  
Figure 2-16 Chain Stack topology  
Figure 2-17 Ring Stack topology  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.3.1 Connecting Stacking cable  
Before attempting to connect stacking ports, verify that you have the required stack cables. The following cables are used to  
connect stacked switches:  
• CB-STX50: 50cm, Short stack cable –used to connect adjacent SGSW switches.  
• CB-STX200: 200cm, Long / Redundant stack cable – used to connect the top and bottom SGSW switches of a stack.  
There are two high-performance HDMI-like Stack ports on the rear panel for proprietary management stack. Only attached  
PLANET CB-STX50 and CB-STX200 cross-overed HDMI cable can be used.  
STEP-1: Plug one end of the cable in the “STX1 / Cascade Down” port and the other end to the ”STX2 / Cascade UP” port of  
next device.  
STEP-2: Repeat the step for every device in the stack cluster, then ending at last switch.  
Figure 2-18 Stacking connection  
STEP-3: If you wish to implement stack redundancy, use the long stack cable –CB-STX200 to connect the stack port marked  
“STX1 / Cascade Down” on the bottom switch to the port marked “STX2 / Cascade Up” on the top switch of the stack.  
The stack port is for management and data packets to be transmitted between other SGSW stackable  
switches, the stack ports can’t be configured with Layer 2 features via management interface.  
STEP-4: Power up the stack switches.  
2.3.2 Management Stacking  
The stack operation of the SGSW Managed Switch supports Plug and Play Stacking connection and auto stack configuration.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
STEP-5: Once the stack start operation, the Stack master be automatically elected without any configure. The Stack master is  
indicated by a lit green “Master” LED on the front panel. As the Figure 2-19 appears.  
Stack ID  
Master LED  
Figure 2-19 Stack Master with “Master” LED lit  
STEP-6: When a SGSW Switch is added to the stack, a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the SGSW Switch. The  
automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page. This  
method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch.  
STEP-7: Connect the RS-232 serial cable to the console port on the front of the stack master, then loin the SGSW Switch to  
start the switch management. Or you can use the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to displayt the IP address of the  
stack and Web login the stack with this IP address. The default IP address of the SGSW Switch is 192.168.0.100.  
Figure 2-20 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
1.  
2.  
The stack switch with least priority ID or MAC Address number will become Master. Only Master  
switch’s management interface (console, telnet, web and SNMP) is accessible.  
It’s allow to build a stack of up to 16 PLANET SGSW Switches. If there is the space limitation or power issue and you wish to  
stack all the switches in different racks, use long stack cables “CB-STX200” to connect two stacks.  
2m stack cable CB-STX200  
2m stack cable CB-STX200  
CB-STX50  
Figure 2-21 Separated Stack connection  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
3. SWITCH MANAGEMENT  
This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch. It describes the  
types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your  
management device (work-station or personal computer) and the system. It also contains information about port connection  
options.  
This chapter covers the following topics:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Requirements  
Management Access Overview  
Administration Console Access  
Web Management Access  
SNMP Access  
Standards, Protocols, and Related Reading  
3.1 Requirements  
„
Workstations of subscribers running Windows 98/ME, NT4.0, 2000/XP, MAC OS9 or later, Linux, UNIX or other  
platform compatible with TCP/IP protocols.  
„
„
Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC (Network Interface Card)  
Serial Port connect (Terminal)  
• Above PC with COM Port (DB-9 / RS-232) or USB-to-RS-232 converter  
Ethernet Port connect  
„
„
• Network cables - Use standard network (UTP) cables with RJ45 connectors.  
Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug-in  
It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6.0 or above to access Managed Switch.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
3.2 Management Access Overview  
The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods:  
„
„
„
An administration console  
Web browser interface  
An external SNMP-based network management application  
The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are  
available for immediate use. Each of these management methods has their own advantages. Table 3-1 compares the three  
management methods.  
Method  
Console  
Advantages  
• No IP address or subnet needed  
• Text-based  
Disadvantages  
• Must be near switch or use dial-up connection  
• Not convenient for remote users  
• Modem connection may prove to be unreliable  
or slow  
• Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal  
built into Windows  
95/98/NT/2000/ME/XP operating  
systems  
• Secure  
Web Browser  
SNMP Agent  
• Ideal for configuring the switch remotely • Security can be compromised (hackers need  
only know the IP address and subnet mask)  
• Compatible with all popular browsers  
• Can be accessed from any location  
• Most visually appealing  
• May encounter lag times on poor connections  
• Communicates with switch functions at  
the MIB level  
• Requires SNMP manager software  
• Least visually appealing of all three methods  
• Some settings require calculations  
• Security can be compromised (hackers need  
only know the community name)  
• Based on open standards  
Table 3-1 Management Methods Comparison  
3.3 Administration Console  
The administration console is an internal, character-oriented, and command line user interface for performing system  
administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings. Using this method, you can view the administration  
console from a terminal, personal computer, Apple Macintosh, or workstation connected to the switch's console (serial) port.  
There are two ways to use this management method: via direct access or modem port access. The following sections describe  
these methods. For more information about using the console, refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console  
Management.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 3-1 Console management  
Direct Access  
Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a  
terminal-emulation program (such as HyperTerminal) to the Managed Switch console (serial) port.  
When using this management method, a straight DB9 RS-232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC. After  
making this connection, configure the terminal-emulation program to use the following parameters:  
The default parameters are:  
„
„
„
„
115200 bps  
8 data bits  
No parity  
1 stop bit  
Figure 3-2 Terminal parameter settings  
You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can  
remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port,  
regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any  
terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator  
such as TIP.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
3.4 Web Management  
The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the  
network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer. After you set up your IP address for the switch, you can  
access the Managed Switch's Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the  
Managed Switch.  
Figure 3-3 Web management  
You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location,  
just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch's console port. Web Management requires either Microsoft  
Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1.5 or later.  
Figure 3-4 Web main screen of Managed Switch  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
3.5 SNMP-Based Network Management  
You can use an external SNMP-based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch, such as SNMPc Network  
Manager, HP Openview Network Node Management (NNM) or What’s Up Gold. This management method requires the SNMP  
agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string. This management  
method, in fact, uses two community strings: the get community string and the set community string. If the SNMP Net-work  
management Station only knows the set community string, it can read and write to the MIBs. However, if it only knows the get  
community string, it can only read MIBs. The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch are public.  
Figure 3-4 SNMP management  
3.6 Protocols  
The Managed Switch supports the following protocols:  
„
„
Virtual terminal protocols, such as Telnet  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
3.6.1 Virtual Terminal Protocols  
A virtual terminal protocol is a software program, such as Telnet, that allows you to establish a management session from a  
Macintosh, a PC, or a UNIX workstation. Because Telnet runs over TCP/IP, you must have at least one IP address configured on  
the Managed Switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol.  
Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly  
to the console (serial) port.  
To access the Managed Switch through a Telnet session:  
1.  
Be Sure of the Managed Switch is configured with an IP address and the Managed Switch is reachable from a PC.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
2.  
Start the Telnet program on a PC and connect to the Managed Switch.  
The management interface is exactly the same with RS-232 console management.  
3.6.2 SNMP Protocol  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the standard management protocol for multi-vendor IP networks. SNMP  
supports transaction-based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting  
devices and data-collection programs. SNMP runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol (UDP), offering a connectionless-mode  
service.  
3.6.3 Management Architecture  
All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface (MAPI). By unifying  
management methods with a single MAPI, configuration parameters set using one method (console port, for example) are  
immediately displayable by the other management methods (for example, SNMP agent of Web browser).  
The management architecture of the switch adheres to the IEEE open standard. This compliance assures customers that the  
Managed Switch is compatible with, and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4. WEB CONFIGURATION  
This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web-Based management.  
About Web-based Management  
The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the  
network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer.  
The Web-Based Management supports Internet Explorer 6.0. It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network  
bandwidth consumption, enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen.  
By default, IE6.0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets. The user has to  
explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports.  
The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection, make sure the manager PC must be set on same the  
IP subnet address with the Managed Switch.  
For example, the default IP address of the WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch is 192.168.0.100, then the manager PC should be  
set at 192.168.0.x (where x is a number between 1 and 254, except 100), and the default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.  
If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192.168.1.1 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 via console,  
then the manager PC should be set at 192.168.1.x (where x is a number between 2 and 254) to do the relative configuration on  
manager PC.  
Figure 4-1-1 Web Management  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Logging on the switch  
1.  
Use Internet Explorer 6.0 or above Web browser. Enter the factory-default IP address to access the Web interface. The  
factory-default IP Address as following:  
http://192.168.0.100  
2.  
When the following login screen appears, please enter the default username "admin" with password “admin” (or the  
username/password you have changed via console) to login the main screen of Managed Switch. The login screen in  
Figure 4-1-2 appears.  
Figure 4-1-2 Login screen  
Default User name: admin  
Default Password: admin  
After entering the username and password, the main screen appears as Figure 4-1-3.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-1-3 Default main page  
Now, you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web  
interface. The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch  
provides.  
1.  
2.  
It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6.0 or above to access Managed Switch.  
The changed IP address take effect immediately after click on the Save button, you need to  
use the new IP address to access the Web interface.  
3.  
4.  
For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.  
Only accept command in lowercase letter under web interface.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.1 Main WEB PAGE  
The WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch provides a Web-based browser interface for configuring and managing it. This interface  
allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice. This chapter describes how to use the  
Managed Switch’s Web browser interface to configure and manage it.  
Main Functions Menu  
Copper Port Link Status  
SFP Port Link Status  
Main Screen  
Figure 4-1-4 Main Page  
Help Button  
Panel Display  
The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to display different information for the  
ports, including Link up or Link down. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page.  
The port states are illustrated as follows:  
State  
Disabled  
Down  
Link  
RJ-45 Ports  
SFP Ports  
Stack Ports  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Main Menu  
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and control the Managed Switch, and all its ports, or  
monitor network conditions. Via the Web-Management, the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions  
those listed in the Main Function. The screen in Figure 4-1-5 appears.  
Figure 4-1-5 WGSW/SGSW Managed Switch Main Funcrions Menu  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2 System  
Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch. Under System the  
following topics are provided to configure and view the system information: This section has the following items:  
■
■
■
System Information  
IP Configuration  
Provides basic system description, including contact information  
Sets the IP address for management access  
Allows to configure the system password required to access the web pages  
or log in from CLI.  
User Authentication  
■
SNTP Configuration  
Simple Network Time Protocol. Configures SNTP client settings, including  
broadcast mode or aspecified list of servers  
■
■
■
■
■
■
Web Firmware Upgrade Upgrade the firmware via Web browser  
TFTP Firmware Upgrade Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server  
Save/view the switch configuration to remote host  
Upload the switch configuration from remote host  
Reset the configuration of the Managed Switch  
Restarts the switch  
Configuration Save  
Configuration Upload  
Factory Default  
System Reboot  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.1 System Information  
The System Info page provides information for the current device information. System Info page helps a switch administrator to  
identify the hardware MAC address, software version and system uptime. The screen in Figure 4-2-1 appears.  
Figure 4-2-1 System Information page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The system contact configured in SNMP \ System Information \ System Contact.  
• Contact  
The system name configured in SNMP \ System Information \ System Name.  
The system location configured in SNMP \ System Information \ System Location  
The MAC Address of this switch.  
• Name  
• Location  
• MAC Address  
• System Date  
The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through  
the configured SNTP Server, if any.  
The period of time the device has been operational.  
• System Uptime  
• Switch ID  
The switch ID. (SGSW-Series Only)  
The software version of the switch.  
• Software Version  
• Software Date  
The date when the switch software was produced.  
Buttons  
Auto-refresh  
: Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
: Click to refresh the page; any changes made locally will be undone.  
For the SGSW series stackable switch, the System Information page add additional column to identify the current switch ID of  
stack member switches in a stack group. The screen as below appears:  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.2 IP Configuration  
The IP Configuration includes the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. The Configured column is used to view or change the  
IP configuration.Fill up the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device. The screen in Figure 4-2-2 appears.  
Figure 4-2-2 IP Configuration page screenshot  
The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration.  
Object  
Description  
Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If DHCP fails and the configured IP  
address is zero, DHCP will retry. If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is  
non-zero, DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used. The DHCP  
client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS  
lookup.  
• DHCP Client  
Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation.  
• IP Address  
• IP Mask  
Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation.  
Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation.  
Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation.  
Provide the managed VLAN ID. The allowed range is 1 through 4095.  
• IP Router  
• SNTP Server  
• VLAN ID  
Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC/GMT.  
The offset is given in minutes east of GMT. The valid range is from -720 to 720  
minutes.  
• Timezone Offset  
Buttons  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
: Click to save changes.  
: Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.  
4.2.3 User Authentication  
This page allows you to configure the system password required to access the web pages or log in from CLI. After setup  
completed, please press “Save” button to take effect. Please login web interface with new password, the screen in Figure 4-2-3  
appears.  
Figure 4-2-3 User Authentication page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Enter the current system password. If this is incorrect, the new password will not  
be set.  
• Old Password  
The system password. The allowed string length is 0 to 31, and the allowed  
content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126. It will not display as it is typed,  
only asterisks (*) will show. Passwords are alpha numeric characters in length,  
and are case sensitive.  
• New Password  
The new password must be entered twice to catch typing errors. To confirm that  
you entered it correctly, this field will not display, but will show asterisks (*)  
• Confirm New  
Password  
After change the default password, if you forget the password. Please press the “Reset” button  
in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release, the current setting  
includes VLAN, will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.4 SNTP Configuration  
In the System sub-function menu, you can see the SNTP Configuration (see Figure 4-4), by which you can configure the time  
settings for the Managed Switch. You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Timezone. The SNTP Configuration screen in  
Figure 4-2-4 appears.  
Figure 4-2-4 SNTP Configuration page screenshot  
The Time page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation.  
Enter a user-defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname. This is a text string  
of up to 64 characters containing the encoded unicast IP address or hostname of  
a SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests will be sent to this address. If this  
address is a DNS hostname, then that hostname should be resolved into an IP  
address each time a SNTP request is sent to it.  
• SNTP Server  
Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC/GMT.  
• Timezone Offset  
• System Date  
The offset is given in minutes east of GMT.  
The valid range is from -720 to 720 minutes.  
Display the current local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt  
of an unsolicited message. The field format is Year-Month-Day HH : MM : SS.  
For example, 2008-08-20 21:15:03  
Display the time passed since the device boot up.  
• System Uptime  
The device supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). SNTP assures accurate  
network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond. Time synchronization is  
performed by a network SNTP server. SNTP operates only as a client, and cannot provide time  
services to other systems.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
It is recommended that you research any time server selection to ensure that it can meet your  
specific time server requirements. Any NTP time server selection should be evaluated to  
determine if the server in question meets your specific time server requirements.  
For more detail about the Time Server and Time Server List, please refer to the following URL:  
http://ntp.isc.org/bin/view/Servers/WebHome  
http://ntp.isc.org/bin/view/Servers/NTPPoolServers  
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/262680/en-us  
4.2.5 WEB Firmware Upgrade  
The Web Firmware Upgrade page contains fields for downloading system image files from the Local File browser to the device.  
The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4-2-5 appears.  
Figure 4-2-5 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot  
To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling:  
1. Click System -> Web Firmware Upgrade.  
2. The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4-2-5.  
3. Click the “Browse” button of the main page, the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware.  
4. Select on the firmware then click “Upload”, the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status.  
5. Once the software be loaded to the system successfully. The following screen appears. Click the “Yes” button to activate  
the new software immediately. The system will load the new software after reboot.  
Figure 4-2-6 Software successfully loaded notice screen  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.6 TFTP Firmware Upgrade  
The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP  
server in the network. Before updating, make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP  
server. The screen in Figure 4-2-7 appears.  
Figure 4-2-7 TFTP Firmware Update page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Fill in your TFTP server IP address.  
The name of firmware image.  
• TFTP Server IP  
• Filename  
(Maximum length : 24 characters)  
Press the button for upgrade the switch firmware.  
• Upgrade button  
To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the folling:  
1. Click System -> TFTP Firmware Upgrade.  
2. The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4-2-7.  
3. Fill in the TFTP server IP Address and the firmware file name, click the “Upgrade” button of the main page, the system  
would pop up the confirm message  
.
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-2-8 TFTP Firmware upgrade pop-up message  
Figure 4-2-9 Firmware Upgrade pop-up message  
4. Click “OK”, the Switch will start the TFTP upgrade procedure.  
5. Please check your TFTP server application to confirm the TFTP file is well transmit to the Switch.  
6. The Switch will reboot then, and It will cost 2 to 3 minutes for the TFTP firmware upgrade and reboot procedure. Please  
wait for the process complete.  
7. Once the new software is loaded to the system successfully, the Login screen appears. Enter the user name and password  
to login the Switch.  
DO NOT Power OFF the switch until the update progress is complete.  
Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without press the “OK” button - after the image be  
loaded. Or the system won’t apply the new firmware. User has to repeat the firmware  
upgrade processes again.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.7 Configuration Save  
This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The  
screen in Figure 4-2-10 appears.  
Figure 4-2-10 Configuration Save page screenshot  
„
Configuration Download: Download the current configuration file of the switch to the local machine.  
„
Configuration Download  
1. Press the “Download” button to save the current configuration in manager workstation. The following screens in Figure  
4-2-11 and 4-2-12 appear  
Figure 4-2-11 File Download screen  
2. Chose the file save path in management workstation.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-2-12 File save screen  
4.2.8 Configuration Upload  
This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station. The  
screen in Figure 4-2-13 appears.  
Figure 4-2-13 Configuration Upload page screenshot  
„
Configuration Upload: Upload the existed configuration file to the Managed Switch. The configuration file had been  
saved at the local machine already.  
„
Configuration Upload  
1. Click the “Browse” button of the main page, the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved  
configuration.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-2-14 Windows file selection menu popup  
2. Select on the configuration file then click “Upload”, the bottom of the browser shows the upload status.  
3. After down, the main screen appears “Transfer Completed”.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.9 Factory Default  
The Factory Reset button can reset the VDSL2 Switch back to the factory default mode. Be aware that the entire configuration  
will be reset; include the IP address of the VDSL2 Switch. Once the Factory Reset item is pressed, the screen in Figure 4-2-15  
appears.  
Figure 4-2-15 Factory Default Reset screen  
After the “Factory” button be pressed and rebooted, the system will load the default IP settings as following:  
。
。
。
。
Default IP address: 192.168.0.100  
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway: 192.168.0.254  
The other setting value is back to disable or none.  
To reset the VDSL2 Switch to the Factory default setting, you can also press the hardware reset  
button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device be rebooted. You can login the  
management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.  
Hardware Reset button  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.2.10 System Reboot  
The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location. Once the Reboot button is pressed, user have to  
re-login the WEB interface about 60 seconds later, the screen in Figure 4-2-16 appears.  
Figure 4-2-16 System Reboot page screenshot  
You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not. If the SYS LED is blinking,  
then it is in the firmware load stage; if the SYS LED light on, you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Example 1: Save Current Configuration setting  
To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as startup configuration. The startup-configuration file will be load  
automatically across a system reboot.  
1. Click System, File Management, Copy Operation.  
2. Select “running-config to startup-config” as the file transfer method.  
3. Select the startup file name used for startup on the Managed Switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click  
Apply.  
Figure 4-2-17 Configuration saving screenshot  
You can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by using the  
System/File Management /Set Start-Up page.  
4. If you specify a new file name to startup-config, click System \ File Management \ Set Start-up to check the specified file be  
set to “Y” in the “Startup” column.  
Figure 4-2-18 Set Start-up screenshot  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Example 2: Downloading System Software from a Server  
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to replace the current image, or first download the  
file using a different name from the current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.  
1. Click System, File Management, Copy Operation.  
2. Select “tftp to file” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server.  
3. Set the file type to “opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the Managed Switch to  
overwrite or specify a new file name and click Apply.  
4. If you replaced the current firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the system via  
the System/Reset menu.  
Figure 4-2-19 Download system software screenshot  
Figure 4-2-20 TFTP Server system software transmit screenshot  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
• If you download to a new destination file, go to the System / File / Set Start-Up menu, mark the operation code file used at  
startup, and click Apply.  
• To start the new firmware, reboot the system via the System / Reset menu.  
• To delete a file, select System / File Management File / Delete. Select the file name from the given list by checking the tick  
box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the startup code cannot be deleted.  
1. Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored in the  
file directory on the Managed Switch.  
2. The currently designated startup version of this file cannot be deleted.  
The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of the file name should  
not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on the TFTP server is 127  
characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, ".", "-",  
"_")  
„
Example 3: Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server  
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the startup file, or you can specify the current  
startup configuration file as the destination file to directly replace it.  
1. Click System / File Management / Copy Operation.  
2. Select “tftp to startup-config” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server.  
3. Enter the file name of the configuration file to download, select a file on the Managed Switch to overwrite or specify a new  
file name and click Apply.  
4. Reboot the system via the System / Reset menu.  
Figure 4-2-21 Download system configuration screenshot  
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file is automatically set as the start-up  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot the system via the System / Reset menu.  
„
Example 4: Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings  
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server. The configuration files can be later downloaded to  
restore the Managed Switch’s settings.  
1. Click System / File Management / Copy Operation.  
2. Select “running-config to tftp” or “startup-config to tftp” as the file transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP  
server.  
3. Enter a new file name for the configuration to upload, and click Apply.  
Figure 4-2-22 Upload system configuration screenshot  
1. The file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be copied to the TFTP server, but cannot  
be used as the destination on the Managed Switch.  
2. The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by available  
flash memory space.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.3 Simple Network Management Protocol  
4.3.1 SNMP Overview  
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management  
information between network devices. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol suite.  
SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance, find and solve network problems, and plan for network  
growth.  
An SNMP-managed network consists of three key components: Network management stations (NMSs), SNMP agents,  
Management information base (MIB) and network-management protocol：  
。
Network management stations (NMSs)：Sometimes called consoles, these devices execute management applications  
that monitor and control network elements. Physically, NMSs are usually engineering workstation-caliber computers with  
fast CPUs, megapixel color displays, substantial memory, and abundant disk space. At least one NMS must be present in  
each managed environment.  
。
。
。
Agents：Agents are software modules that reside in network elements. They collect and store management information  
such as the number of error packets received by a network element.  
Management information base (MIB)：A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store.  
Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules.  
network-management protocol：A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents  
and NMSs. SNMP is the Internet community's de facto standard management protocol.  
SNMP Operations  
SNMP itself is a simple request/response protocol. NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response.  
。
。
。
Get -- Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent.  
Set -- Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent.  
Trap -- Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event. The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to  
replace the SNMPv1 trap message.  
SNMP community  
An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where  
information is sent. The community name is used to identify the group. A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one  
SNMP community. It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities. SNMP  
default communities are:  
。
。
Write = private  
Read = public  
4.3.2 SNMP System Configuration  
Configure SNMP on this page.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-1 appears.  
Figure 4-3-1 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot  
Object  
Description  
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:  
• Enabled: Enable SNMP mode operation.  
• Mode  
• Disabled: Disable SNMP mode operation.  
Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:  
• SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.  
• Version  
• SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.  
• SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.  
Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent.  
The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII  
characters from 33 to 126. The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.  
SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string  
will associated with SNMPv3 communities table.  
• Read Community  
Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent.  
The allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII  
characters from 33 to 126. The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c.  
SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string  
will associated with SNMPv3 communities table.  
• Write Community  
Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID. The string must contain an even number  
between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.  
Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users.  
• Engine ID  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.3.3 SNMP System Information Configuration  
The switch system information is provided here.  
The System Information Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-2 appears.  
Figure 4-3-2 System Information Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node, together  
with information on how to contact this person. The allowed string length is 0 to  
255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126.  
An administratively assigned name for this managed node. By convention, this is  
the node's fully-qualified domain name. A domain name is a text string drawn  
from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No space characters are  
permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character. And  
the first or last character must not be a minus sign. The allowed string length is 0  
to 255.  
• System Contact  
• System Name  
The physical location of this node(e.g., telephone closet, 3rd floor). The allowed  
string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32  
to 126.  
• System Location  
4.3.4 SNMP Trap Configuration  
Configure SNMP trap on this page.  
The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-3 appears.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-3-3 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation. Possible modes are:  
• Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.  
• Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.  
Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:  
• SNMP v1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.  
• SNMP v2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.  
• SNMP v3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.  
Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet. The  
allowed string length is 0 to 255, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters  
from 33 to 126.  
• Trap Mode  
• Trap Version  
• Trap Community  
Indicates the SNMP trap destination address.  
• Trap Destination  
Address  
Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps.  
Possible modes are:  
• Trap Authentication  
Failure  
• Enabled: Enable SNMP trap authentication failure.  
• Disabled: Disable SNMP trap authentication failure.  
Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation. Possible modes are:  
• Enabled: Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation.  
• Disabled: Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation.  
Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout. The allowed range is 0 to 2147.  
• Trap Inform Mode  
• Trap Inform Timeout  
(seconds)  
Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times. The allowed range is 0 to 255.  
• Trap Inform Retry  
Times  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation. Possible  
values are:  
• Trap Probe Security  
Engine ID  
• Enabled: Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.  
• Disabled: Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation.  
Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs  
using USM for authentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and  
informs is needed. When "Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will  
be probed automatically. Otherwise, the ID specified in this field is used. The  
string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but  
all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.  
• Trap Security Engine  
ID  
Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM  
for authentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and  
informs are enabled.  
• Trap Security Name  
4.3.5 SNMPv3 Configuration  
4.3.5.1 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration  
Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this page. The entry index key are Group Name, Security Model and Security Level.  
The SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-4 appears.  
Figure 4-3-4 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
• Delete  
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed  
string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33  
• Group Name  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
to 126.  
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security  
models are:  
• Security Model  
• any: Accepted any security model (v1|v2c|usm).  
• v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.  
• v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.  
• usm: User-based Security Model (USM)  
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security  
models are:  
• Security Level  
• NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.  
• Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.  
• Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.  
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may  
request the current values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed  
content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.  
• Read View Name  
The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may  
potentially SET new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed  
content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.  
• Write View Name  
4.3.5.2 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration  
Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page. The entry index key is Community.  
The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-5 appears.  
Figure 4-3-5 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
• Delete  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent. The  
allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters  
from 33 to 126.  
• Community  
Indicates the SNMP access source address.  
• Source IP  
Indicates the SNMP access source address mask.  
• Source Mask  
4.3.5.3 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration  
Configure SNMPv3 groups table on this page. The entry index key are Security Model and Security Name.  
The SNMPv3 Groups Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-6 appears.  
Figure 4-3-6 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
• Delete  
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security  
models are:  
• Security Model  
• v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.  
• v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.  
• usm: User-based Security Model (USM).  
A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to.  
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII  
characters from 33 to 126.  
• Security Name  
A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to.  
The allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII  
• Group Name  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
characters from 33 to 126.  
4.3.5.4 SNMPv3 Users Configuration  
Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page. The entry index key are Engine ID and User Name.  
The SNMPv3 Users Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-7 appears.  
Figure 4-3-7 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
• Delete  
A octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string  
must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits, but  
all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.  
• Engine ID  
A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed  
string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33  
to 126.  
• User Name  
• Security Level  
Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security  
models are:  
• NoAuth, NoPriv: None authentication and none privacy.  
• Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and none privacy.  
• Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.  
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That  
means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.  
Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible  
authentication protocol are:  
• Authentication  
Protocol  
• None: None authentication protocol.  
• MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
protocol.  
• SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication  
protocol.  
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exist. That  
means must first ensure that the value is set correctly.  
A string identifying the authentication pass phrase. For MD5 authentication  
protocol, the allowed string length is 8 to 32. For SHA authentication protocol, the  
allowed string length is 8 to 40. The allowed content is the ASCII characters from  
33 to 126.  
• Authentication  
Password  
Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy  
protocol are:  
• Privacy Protocol  
• None: None privacy protocol.  
• DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication  
protocol.  
A string identifying the privacy pass phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 32,  
and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.  
• Privacy Password  
4.3.5.5 SNMPv3 Views Configuration  
Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page. The entry index key are View Name and OID Subtree.  
The SNMPv3 Views Configuration screen in Figure 4-3-8 appears.  
Figure 4-3-8 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
• Delete  
• Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed  
string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33  
to 126.  
• View Name  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view type are:  
• included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be  
included.  
• View Type  
• excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be  
excluded.  
General, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', it should be exist another view  
entry which view type is 'included' and it's OID subtree overstep the 'excluded'  
view entry.  
The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed  
OID length is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).  
• OID Subtree  
================================================================================================  
„
EXAMPLE: Add a new SNMPv3 user  
In the New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save the configuration and return to the  
User Name list.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-3-9 SNMPv3 Users-NEW page screenshot  
Once the new SNMPv3 user be successed add and be assign to a snmp group, this entry will shows in the users table.  
Figure 4-3-10 SNMPv3 Users page screenshot  
„
EXAMPLE: Add a new SNMPv3 Group  
In the New Group page, define a name, assign a security model and level, and then select read and write views. Click Add  
to save the new group and return to the Groups list.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-3-11 SNMPv3 Groups-NEW page screenshot  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.4 Port Management  
Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch's ports. This section has the following items:  
„
„
„
Port Configuration  
Port Statistics  
Configures port connection settings  
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics  
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring  
Mirror Port Configuration  
4.4.1 Port Configuration  
This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here.  
The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:  
The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-4-1 appears.  
Figure 4-4-1 Port Configuration page screenshot  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
This is the logical port number for this row.  
• Port  
The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and  
red that it is down.  
• Link  
Provides the current link speed of the port.  
• Current Link Speed  
Select any available link speed for the given switch port. Draw the menu bar to  
select the mode.  
• Configured Link Speed  
• Auto Speed - Setup Auto negotiation.  
• 10 half  
• 10 Full  
• 100 half  
• 100 full  
• 1000 full  
• Disable  
- Force sets 10Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.  
- Force sets 10Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.  
- Force sets 100Mbps/Half-Duplex mode.  
- Force sets 100Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.  
- Force sets 10000Mbps/Full-Duplex mode.  
- Shutdown the port manually.  
When Auto Speed is selected for a port, this section indicates the flow control  
capability that is advertised to the link partner.  
• Flow Control  
When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used.  
• Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are  
obeyed.  
• Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are  
transmitted.  
The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.  
Check the configured column to use flow control.  
This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed.  
Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The  
• Maximum Frame  
allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.  
Configure port transmit collision behavior.  
• Excessive Collision  
Mode  
• Discard: Discard frame after 16 collisions (default).  
• estart: Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions.  
The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per  
port. The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode  
parameters per port.  
• Power Control  
• Disabled: All power savings mechanisms disabled.  
• ActiPHY: Link down power savings enabled.  
• Dynamic: Link up power savings enabled.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
• Enabled: Link up and link down power savings enabled.  
Total power usage in board, measured in percent.  
• Total Power Usage  
When set each port to run at 100M Full, 100M Half, 10M Full, and 10M Half-speed modes. The  
Auto-MDIX function will disable.  
4.4.2 Port Statistics Overview  
This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports. The ports belong to the currently selected stack  
unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4-4-2 appears.  
Figure 4-4-2 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The displayed counters are:  
Object  
Description  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
The number of received and transmitted packets per port.  
The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.  
• Port  
• Packets  
• Bytes  
The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete  
transmissions per port.  
• Errors  
The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.  
• Drops  
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.  
• Filtered  
4.4.3 Detailed Port Statistics  
This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port. Use the port select box to select which switch port details  
to display. The selected port belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, and the error counters  
for receive and transmit. The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-4-3 appears.  
Figure 4-4-3 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The page includes the following fields:  
Receive Total and Transmit Total  
Object  
Description  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets  
• Rx and Tx Packets  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but  
excludes framing bits.  
• Rx and Tx Octets  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.  
• Rx and Tx Unicast  
• Rx and Tx Multicast  
• Rx and Tx Broadcast  
• Rx and Tx Pause  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.  
A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have  
an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation.  
Receive and Transmit Size Counters  
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on their respective frame  
sizes.  
Receive and Transmit Queue Counters  
The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue.  
Receive Error Counters  
Object  
Description  
The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress  
congestion.  
• Rx Drops  
The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.  
• Rx CRC/Alignment  
• Rx Undersize  
• Rx Oversize  
• Rx Fragments  
• Rx Jabber  
The number of short1 frames received with valid CRC.  
The number of long2 frames received with valid CRC.  
The number of short1 frames received with invalid CRC.  
The number of long2 frames received with invalid CRC.  
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.  
Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes.  
Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum  
frame length for this port.  
• Rx Filtered  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Transmit Error Counters  
Object  
Description  
The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.  
The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.  
• Tx Drops  
• Tx Late/Exc. Coll.  
4.4.4 Port Mirroring Configuration  
Configure port Mirroring on this page. This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming  
or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied. It enables the manager to  
keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary.  
• To debug network problems, selected traffic can be copied, or mirrored, to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be  
attached to analyze the frame flow.  
• The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port. You can then attach a protocol  
analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.  
Figure 4-4-4 Port Mirror application  
The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows:  
• All frames received on a given port (also known as ingress or source mirroring).  
• All frames transmitted on a given port (also known as egress or destination mirroring).  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Mirror Port Configuration  
The Port Mirror Configuration screen in Figure 4-4-5 and Figure 4-4-6 appears.  
„
WGSW Standalone Switch  
Figure 4-4-5 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are  
mirrored to this port. Disabled disables mirroring.  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port to mirror to  
• Port  
Select mirror mode.  
• Mode  
Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port.  
Frames transmitted are not mirrored.  
• Rx only  
Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring  
port. Frames received are not mirrored.  
• Tx only  
Neither frames transmitted or frames received are mirrored.  
Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored to the  
mirror port.  
• Disabled  
• Enabled  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
SGSW Stackable Switch  
The SGSW Stackable switch supports port mirror function over stack switch.  
Figure 4-4-6 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot  
Object  
Description  
Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are  
mirrored to this switch.  
• Switch to mirror to  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.5 Link Aggregation  
Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups (LAGs). Port  
Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices, increases port flexibility, and provides link redundancy.  
Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed, set to full-duplex operations. Ports in a LAG, can be of different media types  
(UTP/Fiber, or different fiber types), provided they operate at the same speed.  
Aggregated Links can be assigned manually (Port Trunk) or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol  
(LACP) on the relevant links.  
Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port. Specifically, the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes  
to a non-aggregated port, including auto-negotiation, speed, Duplex setting, etc.  
The device supports the following Aggregation links :  
„
„
Static LAGs (Port Trunk) – Force aggregared selected ports to be a trounk group.  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) LAGs - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP  
ports located on a different device. If the other device ports are also LACP ports, the devices establish a LAG  
between them.  
Figure 4-5-1 Link Aggregation  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner  
Systems that require high speed redundant links. Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single  
dedicated connection. This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network. LACP operation requires full-duplex mode,  
more detail information refer to the IEEE 802.3ad standard.  
Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Link  
aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other  
Layer 2 switches. However, before making any physical connections between devices, use the Link aggregation Configuration  
menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends. When using a port link aggregation, note that:  
• The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type (RJ-45, 100 Mbps fiber).  
• The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions (see below).  
• Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation.  
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports.  
• None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port.  
• All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added or deleted from a VLAN.  
• The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole.  
• Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop.  
• Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to  
avoid creating a data loop.  
It allows a maximum of 16 ports to be aggregated at the same time. The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports (up to  
12 groups). If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregationing group, then any extra ports selected are placed in a  
standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails. If the group is defined as a local static link aggregationing group,  
then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports.  
The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow (for example, a TCP connection) are always  
forwarded on the same link aggregation member port. Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible. The  
aggregation code is  
based on the following information:  
• Source MAC  
• Destination MAC  
• Source and destination IPv4 address.  
• Source and destination TCP/UDP ports for IPv4 packets  
• IPv6 Flow Label  
Normally, all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link  
aggregation member ports. Each link aggregation may consist of up to 16 member ports. Any quantity of link aggregation s may  
be configured for the device (only limited by the quantity of ports on the device.) To configure a proper traffic distribution, the  
ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.5.1 Static Aggregation Configuration  
This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group. The aggregation hash mode settings are  
global, whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
Hash Code Contributors  
Figure 4-5-2 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot  
Object  
Description  
The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the  
frame. Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to  
disable. By default, Source MAC Address is enabled.  
• Source MAC Address  
The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for  
the frame. Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck  
to disable. By default, Destination MAC Address is disabled.  
The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check  
to enable the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address  
is enabled.  
• Destination MAC  
Address  
• IP Address  
The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the  
frame. Check to enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to  
disable. By default, TCP/UDP Port Number is enabled.  
• TCP/UDP Port Number  
Static Aggregation Group Configuration  
The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4-5-3 appears.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-5-3 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
.
Object  
Description  
Indicates the aggregation group type. This field is only valid for stackable  
switches.  
• Locality  
• Global: The group members may reside on different units in the stack. The  
device supports two 8-port global aggregations.  
• Local: The group members reside on the same unit. Each local  
aggregation may consist of up to 16 members.  
Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID  
"Normal" indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.  
Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port  
in an aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the  
aggregation. By default, no ports belong to any aggregation group.  
• Group ID  
• Port Members  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.5.2 LACP Configuration  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) - LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a  
different device. LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the  
same LAG.  
This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change them as well. The LACP port  
settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header. The LACP Port Configuration screen in  
Figure 4-5-4 appears.  
Figure 4-5-4 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number.  
• Port  
Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an  
aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner. LACP can  
form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack.  
• LACP Enabled  
The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the  
key as appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3.  
Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the  
same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group, while ports with  
different keys cannot.  
• Key  
The default setting is “Auto”  
The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets  
• Role  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
each second, while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if  
spoken to).  
4.5.3 LACP System Status  
This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances. The LACP Status page display the current LACP aggregation  
Groups and LACP Port status . The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4-5-5 appears.  
Figure 4-5-5 LACP System Status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance.  
For LLAG the id is shown as 'isid:aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'  
The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.  
• Aggr ID  
• Partner System ID  
• Partner Key  
The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.  
The time since this aggregation changed.  
• Last changed  
• Local Ports  
Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch/stack.  
The format is: "Switch ID:Port".  
4.5.4 LACP Port Status  
This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports.  
The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4-5-6 appears.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-5-6 LACP Port Status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number.  
• Port  
'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is  
not enabled or that the port link is down.  
• LACP  
• Key  
The key assigned to this port.  
Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.  
The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group.  
IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3-14 are LLAGs.  
The partners System ID (MAC address).  
• Aggr ID  
• Partner System ID  
The partners port number connected to this port.  
• Partner Port  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.5.5 LACP statistics  
This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports.  
The LACP statistics screen in Figure 4-5-7 appears.  
Figure 4-5-7 LACP Port statistics page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number.  
• Port  
Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port.  
Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port.  
• LACP Transmitted  
• LACP Received  
• Discarded  
Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each  
port.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6 VLAN  
4.6.1 VLAN Overview  
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical  
layout. VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single  
LAN. VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between  
ports within the VLAN. Typically, a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet, although not necessarily.  
VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth, and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains.  
A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location. End nodes that frequently communicate with  
each other are assigned to the same VLAN, regardless of where they are physically on the network. Logically, a VLAN can be  
equated to a broadcast domain, because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the  
broadcast was initiated.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN  
membership, packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing  
function between the VLAN.  
The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802.1Q VLAN. The port untagging function can be used  
to remove the 802.1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are  
tag-unaware.  
The Switch's default is to assign all ports to a single 802.1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN.  
As new VLAN is created, the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from  
the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list. The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID = 1.  
This section has the following items:  
„
„
„
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling  
Private VLAN  
Enable IEEE 802.1Q Tag based VLAN group  
Enables 802.1Q (QinQ) Tunneling  
Creates/removes primary or community VLANs  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6.2 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains. This Managed Switch  
provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains.  
VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks. This also  
provides a more secure and cleaner network environment.  
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but communicate as though they belong  
to the same physical segment.  
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any  
physical connections. VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups  
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing).  
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow you to make network changes without having  
to update IP addresses or IP subnets. VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through  
a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.  
This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
Up to 4k VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard  
Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol  
Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs  
End stations can belong to multiple VLANs  
Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices  
Priority tagging  
1.  
2.  
The Managed Switch allows 4k user-manageable VLANs.  
One other VLAN (VLAN ID 4093) is reserved for switch clustering.  
■ IEEE 802.1Q Standard  
IEEE 802.1Q (tagged) VLAN are implemented on the Switch. 802.1Q VLAN require tagging, which enables them to span the  
entire network (assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802.1Q-compliant).  
VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains. All packets entering a VLAN will only  
be forwarded to the stations (over IEEE 802.1Q enabled switches) that are members of that VLAN, and this includes broadcast,  
multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources.  
VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network. IEEE 802.1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are  
members of the VLAN. Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging. The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don't recognize VLAN tags in packet headers. The tagging feature allows VLAN  
to span multiple 802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
ports and work normally.  
Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging. The untagging feature of IEEE 802.1Q VLAN allow VLAN to work  
with legacy switches that don’t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers. The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple  
802.1Q-compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work  
normally.  
Some relevant terms:  
-
-
Tagging - The act of putting 802.1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet.  
Untagging - The act of stripping 802.1Q VLAN information out of the packet header.  
■ 802.1Q VLAN Tags  
The figure below shows the 802.1Q VLAN tag. There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address. Their  
presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field. When a packet's Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100, the  
packet carries the IEEE 802.1Q/802.1p tag. The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority,  
1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier (CFI - used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet  
backbones), and 12 bits of VLAN ID (VID). The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802.1p. The VID is the VLAN identifier and is  
used by the 802.1Q standard. Because the VID is 12 bits long, 4094 unique VLAN can be identified.  
The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets. All of the information originally contained  
in the packet is retained.  
802.1Q Tag  
User Priority  
3 bits  
CFI  
VLAN ID (VID)  
1 bits  
12 bits  
TPID (Tag Protocol Identifier)  
2 bytes  
TCI (Tag Control Information)  
2 bytes  
Preamble  
Destination  
Address  
6 bytes  
Source  
Address  
6 bytes  
VLAN TAG  
Ethernet  
Type  
Data  
FCS  
4 bytes  
2 bytes  
46-1517 bytes  
4 bytes  
The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address, but before the original Ether Type/Length or Logical  
Link Control. Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally, the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) must be  
recalculated.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Adding an IEEE802.1Q Tag  
Original Ethernet  
Dest. Addr.  
Src. Addr.  
Length/E. type  
Data  
Old CRC  
Dest. Addr.  
Src. Addr.  
E. type  
Tag  
Length/E. type  
Data  
New CRC  
New Tagged Packet  
Priority  
CFI  
VLAN ID  
■ Port VLAN ID  
Packets that are tagged (are carrying the 802.1Q VID information) can be transmitted from one 802.1Q compliant network  
device to another with the VLAN information intact. This allows 802.1Q VLAN to span network devices (and indeed, the entire  
network – if all network devices are 802.1Q compliant).  
Every physical port on a switch has a PVID. 802.1Q ports are also assigned a PVID, for use within the switch. If no VLAN are  
defined on the switch, all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1. Untagged packets are assigned the  
PVID of the port on which they were received. Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID, in so far as VLAN are concerned.  
Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag. Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID, but the  
PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions, the VID is.  
Tag-aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network. The switch will compare the VID of  
a packet to be transmitted to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet. If the two VID are different the switch will drop the  
packet. Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets, tag-aware and tag-unaware  
network devices can coexist on the same network.  
A switch port can have only one PVID, but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them.  
Because some devices on a network may be tag-unaware, a decision must be made at each port on a tag-aware device before  
packets are transmitted – should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not? If the transmitting port is connected to a  
tag-unaware device, the packet should be untagged. If the transmitting port is connected to a tag-aware device, the packet  
should be tagged.  
■ Default VLANs  
The Switch initially configures one VLAN, VID = 1, called "default." The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to  
the "default". As new VLAN are configured in Port-based mode, their respective member ports are removed from the "default."  
■ Assigning Ports to VLANs  
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN group(s) in which it will participate. By default  
all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports  
on the other VLAN-aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either manually or  
dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the  
intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add this port to  
the VLAN as an untagged port.  
VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network interconnection  
devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end-node host that  
does not support VLAN tagging.  
■ VLAN Classification  
When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the  
frame to an associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the frame is tagged, the switch uses  
the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame.  
■ Port Overlapping  
Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as  
file servers or printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to communicate, you can connect  
them by enabled routing on this switch.  
■ Untagged VLANs  
Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users  
assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch. Packets are  
forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user  
groups or subnets. However, you should use IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible to fully automate VLAN  
registration.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6.3 VLAN Basic Information  
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch.  
The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4-6-1 appears.  
Figure 4-6-1 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch  
• VLAN Mode  
„
„
Port-Based  
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch.  
• Maximum VLAN ID  
Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Managed Switch.  
• Maximum Number of  
Supported VLANs  
• Current number of  
VLANs  
Display the current number of VLANs  
Display the VLAN learning mode. The Managed Switch supports IVL (IVL  
Independent vlan learning).  
• VLAN Learning  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6.4 VLAN Port Configuration  
This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN. The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for  
managing ports that are part of a VLAN. The port default VLAN ID (PVID) is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page. All  
untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID.  
Understand nomenclature of the Switch  
■ IEEE 802.1Q Tagged and Untagged  
Every port on an 802.1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged.  
Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number, priority and other VLAN information into the  
header of all packets that flow into those ports. If a packet has previously been tagged, the port  
will not alter the packet, thus keeping the VLAN information intact. The VLAN information in the  
tag can then be used by other 802.1Q compliant devices on the network to make  
packet-forwarding decisions.  
• Tagged:  
Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802.1Q tag from all packets that flow into those  
ports. If the packet doesn't have an 802.1Q VLAN tag, the port will not alter the packet. Thus,  
all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802.1Q VLAN  
information. (Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch). Untagging is  
used to send packets from an 802.1Q-compliant network device to a non-compliant network  
device.  
• Untagged:  
Frame Income  
Income Frame is tagged  
Income Frame is untagged  
Frame Leave  
Leave port is tagged  
Frame remains tagged  
Tag is removed  
Tag is inserted  
Leave port is untagged  
Frame remain untagged  
■ IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (Q-in-Q)  
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks.  
QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers  
use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s  
frames when they enter the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network.  
A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported.  
VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic passing  
through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer  
configurations, require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of  
4096.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge,  
aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN (Metro Access Network) space. One of the  
purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used  
independent of the customers’ VLANs. This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN-related VID for frames entering  
the MAN. When leaving the MAN, the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer-related VID is again available.  
This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering  
with the VLAN tags. All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8, where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used  
for service provider tags.  
In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch, the learning can be disabled for the particular  
VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports. This way, the MAC table  
requirements is reduced.  
The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-2 appears.  
Figure 4-6-2 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
This is the logical port number for this row.  
• Port  
Allow assign PVID for selected port. The range for the PVID is 1-4094.  
The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port. The  
PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group, or the  
• PVID  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
untagged traffic will be dropped.  
Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box. This parameter affects  
VLAN ingress processing. If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not  
a member of the classified VLAN of the frame, the frame is discarded. By default,  
ingress filtering is disabled (no checkmark).  
• Ingress Filtering  
• Accept Frame Type  
• Link Type  
Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This  
parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged  
frames, untagged frames received on the port are discarded. By default, the field  
is set to All.  
Allow 802.1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port.  
When adding a VLAN to selected port, it tells the switch whether to keep or  
remove the tag from a frame on egress.  
• Untag: outgoing frames without VLAN-Tagged.  
• Tagged: outgoing frames with VLAN-Tagged.  
Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode, and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be  
• Q-in-Q Mode  
configured. The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode.  
The port operates in its normal VLAN mode.  
(This is the default.)  
• Disable  
Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for an uplink  
port to another device within the service provider network.  
Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for a client  
access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN  
IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network.  
• MAN Port:  
• Customer Port:  
The Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) specifies the ethertype of incoming packets  
on a tunnel access port.  
• Set Out layer VLAN tag  
ether type  
• 802.1Q Tag : 8100  
• vMAN Tag : 88A8  
Default : 802.1Q Tag  
Configures the VLAN identifier for the port. The allowed values are 1 through  
4095. The default value is 1.  
• Port VLAN ID  
The port must be a member of the same VLAN as the Port VLAN ID.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6.5 VLAN Membership Configuration  
„
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)  
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index. Assign ports as tagged if they are connected  
to 802.1Q VLAN compliant devices, or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN-aware devices.  
The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here. Up to 64  
VLANs are supported. This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each  
VLAN. The VLAN Membership Configuration screen in Figure 4-6-3 appears.  
Figure 4-6-3 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
To delete a VLAN entry, check this box.  
The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save.  
Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN.  
• Delete  
• VLAN ID  
A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID. To include a  
port in a VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN,  
make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all  
boxes are unchecked.  
• Port Members  
Click to add a new VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the VLAN  
can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.  
The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on "Save".  
The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units, but with no port  
members.  
• Adding a New VLAN  
A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you  
click "Save".  
The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.6.6 Private VLAN Configuration  
Overview  
When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN, communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented. Two  
application examples are provided in this section:  
• Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN, but they are not allowed to communicate with each  
other within that VLAN.  
• Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone (DMZ) are allowed to communicate with the outside world and  
with database servers on the inside segment, but are not allowed to communicate with each other  
For private VLANs to be applied, the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation When this is in place, one or  
more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs. Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups:  
„
Promiscuous ports  
— Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN  
— Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN  
Isolated ports  
„
— Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscous ports in the private VLAN  
— Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN  
The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs. When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port  
in a private VLAN, the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied. When traffic comes in on an isolated port, the private VLAN  
mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table. This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to  
just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN.  
The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header. This feature works across the stack.  
Figure 4-6-4 Private VLAN Configuration page screenshot  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch interface.  
• Port  
Displays private VLAN port types.  
Isolated  
A single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous  
• PVLAN Port Type  
port and one or more isolated (or host) ports. This VLAN  
conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone  
promiscuous port.  
- Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces  
within a private VLAN.  
This is the default setting.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.7 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops, and to provide backup links between switches,  
bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route  
exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link  
goes down. The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:  
„
„
STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)  
The IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802.1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links  
between switches that form loops within the network. When multiple links between switches are detected, a primary link is  
established. Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links. The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be  
used in the event of a failure of the primary link. Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled, primary links are  
established and duplicated links are blocked automatically. The reactivation of the blocked links (at the time of a primary link  
failure) is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention.  
This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users. However, the concepts of the Spanning  
Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood. It is possible  
to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured. Please read the  
following before making any changes from the default values.  
The Switch STP performs the following functions:  
„
„
Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements.  
Creates multiple spanning trees – from any combination of ports contained within a single switch, in user specified  
groups.  
„
„
Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure, addition, or removal of any element in  
the tree.  
Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention.  
Bridge Protocol Data Units  
For STP to arrive at a stable network topology, the following information is used:  
„
„
„
The unique switch identifier  
The path cost to the root associated with each switch port  
The por tidentifier  
STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs). Each BPDU contains the  
following information:  
„
„
„
The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch  
The path cost to the root from the transmitting port  
The port identifier of the transmitting port  
The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning-tree topology. All switches connected to the LAN on  
which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU. BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch, but the receiving switch  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU, and, if the topology changes, initiates a BPDU transmission.  
The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following:  
„
„
„
One switch is elected as the root switch  
The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch  
A designated switch is selected. This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded  
to the root.  
„
„
A port for each switch is selected. This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch.  
Ports included in the STP are selected.  
Creating a Stable STP Topology  
It is to make the root port a fastest link. If all switches have STP enabled with default settings, the switch with the lowest MAC  
address in the network will become the root switch. By increasing the priority (lowering the priority number) of the best switch,  
STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch.  
When STP is enabled using the default parameters, the path between source and destination stations in a switched network  
might not be ideal. For instance, connecting higher-speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can  
cause a root-port change.  
STP Port States  
The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network. This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that  
transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops. Ports must wait for new  
network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets. They must also wait for  
the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology. The forward delay timer is used to  
allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change. In addition, STP specifies a series of states a port must  
transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change.  
Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states:  
„
„
„
„
„
Blocking – the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets  
Listening – the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state  
Learning – the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database, but not yet forwarding packets  
Forwarding – the port is forwarding packets  
Disabled – the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first  
A port transitions from one state to another as follows:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
From initialization (switch boot) to blocking  
From blocking to listening or to disabled  
From listening to learning or to disabled  
From learning to forwarding or to disabled  
From forwarding to disabled  
From disabled to blocking  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Switch  
Blocking  
Listening  
Learning  
Forwarding  
Disable  
Figure 4-7-1 STP Port State Transitions  
You can modify each port state by using management software. When you enable STP, every port on every switch in the  
network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up. If properly  
configured, each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state. No packets (except BPDUs) are forwarded from, or received  
by, STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port.  
2. STP Parameters  
STP Operation Levels  
The Switch allows for two levels of operation: the switch level and the port level. The switch level forms a spanning tree  
consisting of links between one or more switches. The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more  
ports. The STP operates in much the same way for both levels.  
On the switch level, STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root  
Bridge and the Designated Bridges.  
On the port level, STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports.  
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the switch level:  
Parameter  
Description  
Default Value  
Bridge Identifier(Not user  
configurable  
A combination of the User-set priority and  
the switch’s MAC address.  
32768 + MAC  
except by setting priority  
below)  
The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts:  
a 16-bit priority and a 48-bit Ethernet MAC  
address 32768 + MAC  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Priority  
A relative priority for each switch – lower  
32768  
numbers give a higher priority and a greater  
chance of a given switch being elected as  
the root bridge  
Hello Time  
The length of time between broadcasts of  
the hello message by the switch  
Measures the age of a received BPDU for a  
port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded  
when its age exceeds the value of the  
maximum age timer.  
2 seconds  
Maximum Age Timer  
20 seconds  
Forward Delay Timer  
The amount time spent by a port in the  
learning and listening states waiting for a  
BPDU that may return the port to the  
blocking state.  
15 seconds  
The following are the user-configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level:  
Variable  
Description  
Default Value  
Port Priority  
A relative priority for each  
128  
port –lower numbers give a higher priority  
and a greater chance of a given port being  
elected as the root port  
Port Cost  
A value used by STP to evaluate paths –  
STP calculates path costs and selects the  
path with the minimum cost as the active  
path  
200,000-100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports  
20,000-1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet  
ports  
0 - Auto  
Default Spanning-Tree Configuration  
Feature  
Default Value  
Enable state  
Port priority  
Port cost  
STP disabled for all ports  
128  
0
Bridge Priority  
32,768  
User-Changeable STA Parameters  
The Switch’s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations. However, it is advisable to keep the default settings  
as set at the factory; unless, it is absolutely necessary. The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows:  
Priority – A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535. 0 is equal to the highest Priority.  
Hello Time – The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds. This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent  
by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge. If you set a Hello Time for your Switch, and it is not  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
the Root Bridge, the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge.  
The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max. Age. Otherwise, a configuration error will  
occur.  
Max. Age – The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds. At the end of the Max Age, if a BPDU has still not been received from  
the Root Bridge, your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge. If it  
turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier, it will become the Root Bridge.  
Forward Delay Timer – The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds. This is the time any port on the  
Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state.  
Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters:  
Max. Age _ 2 x (Forward Delay - 1 second)  
Max. Age _ 2 x (Hello Time + 1 second)  
Port Priority – A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be chosen as  
the Root Port.  
Port Cost – A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000. The lower the number, the greater the probability the port will be  
chosen to forward packets.  
3. Illustration of STP  
A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram. In this example, you can anticipate  
some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied.  
If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B, switch B will broadcast it to switch C, and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch  
A and so on. The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop, potentially causing a network failure. In this example,  
STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C. The decision to block a particular connection is based  
on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings.  
Now, if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C, then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there.  
Setting-up STP using values other than the defaults, can be complex. Therefore, you are advised to keep the default factory  
settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges/ports and block loop connections. Influencing STP to choose a particular  
switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting, or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority  
and Port Cost settings is, however, relatively straight forward.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
LAN 1  
Portcast = 19  
Port 3  
A
Bridge ID = 15  
Port 2  
Port 1  
Portcast = 4  
Portcast = 4  
Portcast = 4  
Portcast = 4  
Port 1  
Port 1  
B
C
Bridge ID = 30  
Bridge ID = 20  
Port 3  
Port 3  
Port 2  
Port 2  
Portcast = 19  
Portcast = 19  
LAN 2  
Portcast = 19  
LAN 3  
Figure 4-7-5 Before Applying the STA Rules  
In this example, only the default STP values are used.  
LAN 1  
Port 3  
A
Root Bridge  
Port 2  
Port 1  
Designated Port  
Designated Port  
Root Port  
Root Port  
Port 1  
Port 1  
B
C
Designated Bridge  
Blocked  
Port 3  
Port 3  
Port 2  
Port 2  
LAN 2  
LAN 3  
Figure 4-7-6 After Applying the STA Rules  
The switch with the lowest Bridge ID (switch C) was elected the root bridge, and the ports were selected to give a high port cost  
between switches B and C. The two (optional) Gigabit ports (default port cost = 4) on switch A are connected to one (optional)  
Gigabit port on both switch B and C. The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast  
Ethernet link (default port cost = 19). Gigabit ports could be used, but the port cost should be increased from the default to  
ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.7.1 RSTP System Configuration  
This page allows you to configure RSTP system settings. The settings are used by all RSTP Bridge instances in the Switch or  
switch Stack. The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols:  
‧
Compatiable -- Spanning Tree Protocol (STP):Provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and  
eliminating loops.  
‧
Normal -- Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) : Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster  
spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.  
The RSTP System Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-7 appears.  
Figure 4-7-7 RSTP System Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
A value used to represent the priority component of a Bridge Identifier.  
• System Priority  
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the  
Root Bridge. Valid values are in the range 6 to 200 seconds.  
-Default: 20  
• Max Age  
-Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].  
-Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay -1)]  
The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to  
Forwarding (used in STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30  
seconds  
• Forward Delay  
-Default: 15  
-Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]  
-Maximum: 30  
The STP compatibility mode setting.  
• Protocol Version  
Normal – Rapid STP (802.1w): Detects and uses of network topologies that  
provide faster spanning tree convergence, without creating forwarding loops.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Compatible – Classis STP (802.1d): Provides a single path between end  
stations, avoiding and eliminating loops.  
The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree  
protocol. While select “Compatibles” mode, the system use the RSTP (802.1w) to compatible and  
co work with another STP (802.1d)’s BPDU control packets.  
4.7.2 RSTP Bridge Status  
This page provides a status overview for all RSTP bridge instances.  
The displayed table contains a row for each RSTP bridge instance, where the column displays the following information:  
The RSTP Bridge Status screen in Figure 4-7-8 appears.  
Figure 4-7-8 RSTP Bridge Status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The VLAN ID associated with this Bridge instance. This is also a link to the RSTP  
Detailed Bridge Status.  
• VLAN ID  
The number switch ports active in the RSTP bridge instance (aggregated ports  
count only as one).  
• Active Ports  
The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.  
• Bridge ID  
• Root ID  
The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.  
The switch port currently assigned the root port role.  
• Root Port  
• Root Cost  
Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge this is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the  
sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.  
The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance.  
• Topology Flag  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.7.3 RSTP Port Configuration  
This page allows the user to inspect the current RSTP port configurations, and possibly change them as well.  
This page contain settings for aggregations and physical ports. The aggregation settings are stack global.  
The RSTP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The RSTP Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-7-9 appears.  
Figure 4-7-9 RSTP Port Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.  
• Port  
Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port.  
• RSTP Enabled  
Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost  
as appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended  
values. Using the Specific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The  
path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network. Lower  
• Path Cost  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports.  
Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.  
Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having  
identical port cost. (See above).  
• Priority  
Default: 128  
Range: 0-240, in steps of 16  
Controls whether the port is known to connect directly to edge devices. (no  
Bridges attached). The Edge flag is cleared by receipt of any BPDUs on the port.  
Transitioning to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports than for other ports.  
• Edge  
(This applies to physical ports only. Aggregations are always Non-Edge).  
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than a shared  
medium. This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false.  
Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for  
shared media.  
• Point2Point  
(This applies to physical ports only. Aggregations are always forced Point2Point).  
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port, and configures the path cost  
according to the values shown below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost  
method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to  
65,535.  
Port Type  
IEEE 802.1D-1998  
50-600  
IEEE 802.1w-2001  
200,000-20,000,000  
20,000-2,000,000  
2,000-200,000  
Ethernet  
Fast Ethernet  
Gigabit Ethernet  
10-60  
3-10  
Table 4-7-1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range  
Port Type  
Ethernet  
Link Type  
IEEE 802.1D-1998  
IEEE 802.1w-2001  
2,000,000  
1,999,999  
1,000,000  
200,000  
Half Duplex  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
100  
95  
90  
19  
18  
15  
4
Fast Ethernet  
Half Duplex  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
100,000  
50,000  
Gigabit Ethernet  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
10,000  
3
5,000  
Table 4-7-2 Recommended STP Path Costs  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Port Type  
Ethernet  
Link Type  
Half Duplex  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
IEEE 802.1w-2001  
2,000,000  
1,000,000  
500,000  
Fast Ethernet  
Half Duplex  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
200,000  
100,000  
50,000  
Gigabit Ethernet  
Full Duplex  
Trunk  
10,000  
5,000  
Table 4-7-3 Default STP Path Costs  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.7.4 RSTP Port Status  
This page displays the RSTP port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.  
The RSTP Port Status screen in Figure 4-7-10 appears.  
Figure 4-7-10 RSTP Port Status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.  
• Port  
The current RSTP port role. The port role can be one of the following values:  
• Role  
• Disabled  
• Alternate  
• Backup  
• Root  
• Designated  
• Non-STP.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The current RSTP port state. The port state can be one of the following values:  
• State  
• Disabled  
• Blocking  
• Learning  
• Forwarding  
• Non-STP.  
The RSTP Bridge instance (VLAN ID). This is also a link to the RSTP Detailed  
Bridge Status, if the port is RSTP enabled.  
• Bridge  
4.7.5 RSTP Port Statistics  
This page displays the RSTP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch.  
The RSTP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4-7-11 appears.  
Figure 4-7-11 RSTP Statistics page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number of the logical RSTP port.  
• Port  
The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.  
• RSTP  
The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the  
• STP  
port.  
The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's  
• TCN  
received/transmitted on the port.  
The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the  
• Discarded Unknown  
• Discarded Illegal  
port.  
The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the  
port.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8 Quality of Service  
4.8.1 Understand QOS  
Quality of Service (QoS) is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic. QoS  
enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic, such as multi-media, video, protocol-specific,  
time critical, and file-backup traffic.  
QoS reduces bandwidth limitations, delay, loss, and jitter. It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and  
allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network. You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat  
selected applications and types of traffic.  
You can use QoS on your system to:  
• Control a wide variety of network traffic by:  
• Classifying traffic based on packet attributes.  
• Assigning priorities to traffic (for example, to set higher priorities to time-critical or business-critical applications).  
• Applying security policy through traffic filtering.  
• Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing  
delay and jitter.  
• Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows.  
• Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network.  
• Manage network congestion.  
QoS Terminology  
• Classifier－classifies the traffic on the network. Traffic classifications are determined by protocol, application, source,  
destination, and so on. You can create and modify classifications. The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to  
schedule them with the appropriate service level.  
• DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) － is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain  
applications and/or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network.  
• Service Level－defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic. You can create and modify service  
levels.  
• Policy－comprises a set of “rules” that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business. That  
is, traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type.  
• QoS Profile－consists of multiple sets of rules (classifier plus service level combinations). The QoS profile is assigned  
to a port(s).  
• Rules－comprises a service level and a classifier to define how theSwitch will treat certain types of traffic. Rules are  
associated with a QoS Profile (see above).  
To implement QoS on your network, you need to carry out the following actions:  
1.  
2.  
Define a service level to determine the priority that will be applied to traffic.  
Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
3.  
4.  
Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier.  
Apply a QoS profile to a port(s).  
4.8.2 QoS Control List Configuration  
This page lists the QCEs for a given QCL.  
„
„
„
„
„
Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes: Low, Normal, Medium, and High.  
The classification is controlled by a QoS assigned to each port.  
A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs.  
Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class.  
This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID, UDP/TCP port, IPv4/IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority.  
Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port.  
The QoS Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-1 appears.  
Figure 4-8-1 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Select a QCL to display a table that lists all the QCEs for that particular QCL.  
• QCL #  
Specifies which frame field the QCE processes to determine the QoS class of the  
frame.The following QCE types are supported:  
• QCE Type  
• Ethernet Type: The Ethernet Type field. If frame is tagged, this is the  
Ethernet Type that follows the tag header.  
• VLAN ID: VLAN ID. Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged.  
• TCP/UDP Port: IPv4 TCP/UDP source/destination port.  
• DSCP: IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP.  
• ToS: The 3 precedence bit in the ToS byte of the IPv4/IPv6 header (also  
known as DS field).  
• Tag Priority: User Priority. Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged or  
priority tagged.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Indicates the value according to its QCE type.  
• Type Value  
• Ethernet Type: The field shows the Ethernet Type value.  
• VLAN ID: The field shows the VLAN ID.  
• TCP/UDP Port: The field shows the TCP/UDP port range.  
• DSCP: The field shows the IPv4/IPv6 DSCP value.  
The QoS class associated with the QCE.  
• Traffic Class  
• Modification Buttons  
You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons:  
: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.  
: Edits the QCE.  
: Moves the QCE up the list.  
: Moves the QCE down the list.  
: Deletes the QCE.  
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL.  
4.8.2.1 QoS Control Entry Configuration  
Configure a new QoS Control Entry on this page.  
„
„
„
„
„
Frames can be classified by up to 4 different QoS classes: Low, Normal, Medium, and High.  
The classification is controlled by a QCL assigned to each port.  
A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs.  
Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS Class.  
This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID, UDP/TCP port, IPv4/IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority.  
Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port.  
The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-2 appears.  
Figure 4-8-2 QCE Configuration page screenshot  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Select the available type for the specific QCE.  
• QCE Type  
• Ethernet Type: Matches the received frame's EtherType against the QCE  
Key.  
• VLAN ID: Matches the frame's VID against the QCE Key.  
• TCP/UDP Port: Matches the destination port and the source port against  
the QCE Key.  
• DSCP: Matches the received IPv4/IPv6 DSCP value (6 bits) against the two  
DSCP values in the QCE Key.  
• ToS: Uses the precedence part of the IPv4/IPv6 ToS (3 bits) as an index to  
the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key.  
• Tag Priority: Uses the User Priority value (3 bits) as an index to the eight  
QoS Class values in the QCE Key.  
Configure the values according to the QCE type you select.  
• Ethernet Type: The allowed values for this type range from 0x600 (1536) to  
0xFFFF (65535).  
• Type Value  
• VLAN ID: The allowed values for this type range from 1 to 4095.  
• TCP/UDP Port Range: Specify whether there is a range or a specific port  
number. The port range allowed is from 0 to 65535.  
• DSCP: The allowed range is 0 to 63. ToS or Tag Priority do not have type  
value settings.  
Select a traffic class of Low, Normal, Medium, or High to apply to the QCE.  
If the QCE type is ToS or Tag Priority, there are 8 rows of traffic class that can be  
configured for each priority.  
• Traffic Class  
4.8.3 Port QoS Configuration  
This page allows you to configure QoS settings for each port.  
• Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes: Low, Normal, Medium, and High.  
• The classification is controlled by a QCL that is assigned to each port.  
• A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs.  
• Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class.  
• This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID, UDP/TCP port, IPv4/IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority.  
• Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS class for the port.  
• The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The Port QoS Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-3 appears.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-8-3 Port QoS Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Configure the number of traffic classes as "1", "2", or "4".  
The default value is "4".  
• Number of Classes  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port  
Configure the default QoS class for the port, that is, the QoS class for frames not  
matching any of the QCEs in the QCL.  
• Default Class  
Select which QCL to use for the port.  
• QCL #  
Select the default user priority for this port when adding a Tag to the untagged  
• User Priority  
frames.  
Select which Queuing mode for this port.  
• Queuing Mode  
Setting Queue weighted(Low:Normal:Medium:High) if the "Queuing Mode" is  
"Weighted".  
• Queue Weighted  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.4 QCL Configuration Wizard  
This handy wizard helps you set up a QCL quickly.  
The QCL Configuration Wizard screen in Figure 4-8-5 appears.  
Figure 4-8-5 Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies.  
• Set up Port Policies  
Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control.  
• Set up Typical Network  
Application Rules  
• Set up ToS Precedence  
Mapping  
Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS (3 bits) when  
receiving IPv4/IPv6 packets.  
Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value (3 bits) when receiving  
VLAN tagged packets.  
• Set up VLAN Tag  
Priority Mapping  
4.8.4.1 Set up Policy Rules  
Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies. The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as  
reflected by the page header. The screen in Figure 4-8-6 appears..  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-8-6 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot  
The page includes the folling fileds:  
Object  
Description  
Frames that hit this QCE are set to match this specific QCL.  
• QCL ID  
A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each QCL ID. To include a  
port in a QCL member, click the radio button.  
• Port Members  
Once the QCL configuration wizard is finished, the below screen appears.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.4.2 Set up Typical Network Application Rules  
Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control.  
„
STEP-1  
Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your  
rule:  
Figure 4-8-7 Set up Typical Netowrk Application Rules page screenshot  
The page includes the folling fileds:  
Object  
Description  
Indicates the common servers that apply to the specific QCE .  
The common servers are:  
• Audio and Video  
• QuickTime 4 Server  
• MSN Messenger Phone  
• Yahoo Messenger Phone  
• Napster  
• Real Audio  
Indicates the common games that apply to the specific QCE.  
• Games  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific QCE. The user definitions  
are:  
• User Definition  
• Ethernet Type: Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this QCE. The allowed  
range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF.  
• VLAN ID: VLAN ID filter for this QCE. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.  
• UDP/TCP Port: Specify the TCP/UDP port filter for this QCE. The allowed  
range is 0 to 65535.  
• DSCP: Specify the DSCP filter for this QCE. The allowed range is 0 to 63.  
Buttons  
Cancal Wizard : Click to cancel the wizard.  
< Back : Click to go back to the previous wizard step.  
Netx > : Click to continue the wizard.  
„
STEP-2  
According to your selection on the previous page, this wizard will create specific QCEs (QoS Control Entries) automatically.  
First select the QCL ID for these QCEs, and then select the traffic class. Different parameter options are displayed depending on  
the frame type that you selected.  
Figure 4-8-9 Set up Typical Netowrk Application Rules page 2 screenshot  
The page includes the folling fileds:  
Object  
Description  
Select the QCL ID to which these QCEs apply,  
• QCL ID  
Select a traffic class of Low, Normal, Medium, or High to apply to the QCE.  
• Traffic Class  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.4.3 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping  
Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS (3 bits) when receiving IPv4/IPv6 packets. The screen in Figure  
4-8-10 appears.  
Figure 4-8-10 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping page screenshot  
The page includes the folling fileds:  
Object  
Description  
Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies.  
• QCL ID  
Select a traffic class of Low, Normal, Medium, or High to apply to the QCE.  
• ToS Precedence Class  
The QCL configuration wizard is finished, and the new configuration is ready for use.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.4.4 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping  
Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value (3 bits) when receiving VLAN tagged packets.  
The screen in Figure 4-8-11 appears.  
Figure 4-8-11 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping page screenshot  
The page includes the folling fileds:  
Object  
Description  
Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies.  
• QCL ID  
Select a traffic class of Low, Normal, Medium, or High to apply to the QCE.  
• VLAN Priority Class  
The QCL configuration wizard is finished, and the new configuration is ready for use.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.5 QoS Statistics  
This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports. The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as  
reflected by the page header. The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4-8-12 appears.  
Figure 4-8-12 QoS Statistics page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port  
There are 4 QoS queues per port with strict or weighted queuing scheduling. This  
is the lowest priority queue.  
• Low Queue  
This is the normal priority queue of the 4 QoS queues. It has higher priority than  
the "Low Queue".  
• Normal Queue  
• Medium Queue  
This is the medium priority queue of the 4 QoS queues. It has higher priority than  
the "Normal Queue".  
This is the highest priority queue of the 4 QoS queues.  
• High Queue  
The number of received and transmitted packets per port.  
• Receive/Transmit  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.6 Bandwidth Control  
Configure the switch port rate limit for Policers and Shapers on this page. The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit,  
as reflected by the page header. The screen Bandwidth Control in Figure 4-8-13 appears.  
Figure 4-8-13 XXXXXXX page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port  
Enable or disable the port policer. The default value is "Disabled".  
• Policer Enabled  
Configure the rate for the port policer. The default value is "500". This value is  
restricted to 500-1000000 when the "Policer Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to  
1-1000 when the "Policer Unit" is "Mbps"  
• Policer Rate  
Configure the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps or Mbps. The  
default value is "kbps".  
• Policer Unit  
Enable or disable the port shaper. The default value is "Disabled".  
• Shaper Enabled  
Configure the rate for the port shaper. The default value is "500". This value is  
restricted to 500-1000000 when the "Policer Unit" is "kbps", and it is restricted to  
1-1000 when the "Policer Unit" is "Mbps"  
• Shaper Rate  
Configure the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps. The  
default value is "kbps".  
• Shaper Unit  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.8.7 Storm Control Configuration  
Storm control for the switch is configured on this page. There three types of storm rate control:  
„
„
„
Unicast storm rate control  
Multicast storm rate control  
Broadcast storm rate control.  
The rate is 2^n, where n is equal to or less than 15, or "No Limit". The unit of the rate can be either pps (packets per second) or  
kpps (kilopackets per second). The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast, multicast, or broadcast traffic  
across the switch.  
The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4-8-14 appears.  
Figure 4-8-14 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here:  
• Frame Type  
• unicast  
• multicast  
• broadcast.  
Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type.  
• Status  
The rate unit is packet per second (pps), configure the rate as 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,  
64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, or 1024K.  
The 1 kpps is actually 1002.1 pps.  
• Rate  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.9 Multicast  
4.9.1 IGMP Snooping  
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) lets host and routers share information about multicast groups  
memberships. IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU  
for feature processing. The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are  
a member of the multicast group.  
About the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Snooping  
Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will  
become members of a multicast group. The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is used to communicate this  
information. IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active. In the case  
where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network, one router is elected as the ‘queried’. This router then keeps  
track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members. The information received from IGMP is then used to  
determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not. The router can check, using IGMP, to see if  
there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work. If there are no members on a sub network, packets  
will not be forwarded to that sub network.  
Figure 4-9-1 Multicast Service  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-9-2 Multicast flooding  
Figure 4-9-3 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IGMP Versions 1 and 2  
Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time. IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to  
communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group.  
IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112. It has a fixed packet size and no optional data.  
The format of an IGMP packet is shown below:  
IGMP Message Format  
Octets  
0
8
16  
31  
Type  
Response Time  
Checksum  
Group Address (all zeros if this is a query)  
The IGMP Type codes are shown below:  
Type  
Meaning  
0x11  
0x11  
Membership Query (if Group Address is 0.0.0.0)  
Specific Group Membership Query (if Group Address is  
Present)  
0x16  
0x17  
0x12  
Membership Report (version 2)  
Leave a Group (version 2)  
Membership Report (version 1)  
IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups, on their respective sub networks.  
The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP.  
A host sends an IGMP “report” to join a group  
A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group (for version 1).  
A host will send a “leave” report when it wants to leave a group (for version 2).  
Multicast routers send IGMP queries (to the all-hosts group address: 224.0.0.1) periodically to see whether any group members  
exist on their sub networks. If there is no response from a particular group, the router assumes that there are no group members  
on the network.  
The Time-to-Live (TTL) field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks.  
IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN, an explicit leave  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
message, and query messages that are specific to a given group.  
The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below:  
Non-Member  
Leave Group  
Leave Group  
(Stop Timer)  
Join Group  
(Send Report,  
Start Timer)  
Query Received  
(Start Timer)  
Delaying Member  
Idle Member  
Report Received  
(Stop Timer)  
Timer Expried  
(Send report)  
Figure 4-9-4 IGMP State Transitions  
„
IGMP Querier –  
A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more  
than one router/switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier” and assumes the  
role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast  
switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.  
Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such as  
DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.9.2 IGMP Snooping Configuration  
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.  
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected  
by the page header.  
The IGMP Snooping Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-5 appears.  
Figure 4-9-5 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.  
• Snooping Enabled  
Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding.  
• Unregistered IPMC  
Flooding enabled  
• VLAN ID  
The VLAN ID of the entry.  
Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping.  
• IGMP Snooping  
Enabled  
Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN. The Querier will send out if no Querier  
received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled. Each Querier's interval is  
125 second, and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from  
other devices.  
• IGMP Querier  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.9.3 IGMP Port Related Configuration  
This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration.  
Most of the settings are global, whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected  
by the page header.  
The IGMP Port Related Configuration screen in Figure 4-9-6 appears.  
Figure 4-9-6 IGMP Port Related Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet  
switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.  
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation  
will act as a router port.  
• Router Port  
Enable the Fast Leave on the port.  
• Fast Leave  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.9.4 IGMP Snooping Status  
This page provides IGMP Snooping status.  
The status relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The IGMP Snooping status screen in Figure 4-9-7 appears.  
Figure 4-9-7 IGMP Snooping status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The VLAN ID of the entry.  
• VLAN ID  
The present IGMP groups. Max. are 128 groups for each VLAN.  
The ports that are members of the entry.  
Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".  
The number of Transmitted Querier.  
• Groups  
• Port Members  
• Querier Status  
• Querier Transmit  
• Querier Receive  
• V1 Reports Receive  
• V2 Reports Receive  
• V3 Reports Receive  
• V2 Leave Receive  
The number of Received Querier.  
The number of Received V1 Reports.  
The number of Received V2 Reports.  
The number of Received V3 Reports.  
The number of Received V2 Leave.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.9.5 Multicast Address Table  
The Multicast Address Table screen in Figure 4-9-8 appears.  
Figure 4-9-8 Multicast Address Table page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
The VLAN ID for the entry.  
• Delete  
• VLAN ID  
The MAC address for the entry.  
• MAC Address  
• Port Members  
Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as  
needed to modify the entry.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10 IEEE 802.1X Network Access Control  
Overview of 802.1X (Port-Based) Authentication  
In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, and the RADIUS server is the  
authentication server. The switch acts as the man-in-the-middle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant  
and the authentication server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames, known as EAPOL  
(EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748). Frames sent between the switch and the  
RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the  
switch's IP address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in that it allows for different  
authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't  
need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how many information  
exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the  
relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) and forwards it.  
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication. Besides  
forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the  
supplicant.  
Overview of MAC-Based Authentication  
Unlike 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a best-practices method adopted by the industry. In  
MAC-based authentication, users are called clients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame  
(any kind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's MAC address as both username and  
password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the  
following form "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased hexadecimal digits. The  
switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method, so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.  
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication, which in turn causes the switch to  
open up or block traffic for that particular client, using static entries into the MAC Table. Only then will frames from the client be  
forwarded on the switch. There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based Authentication  
has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.  
The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through  
a 3rd party switch or a hub) and still require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant software  
to authenticate. The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users, equipment whose MAC address  
is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone, and only the MD5-Challenge method is supported.  
The 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections, a system- and a port-wide.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.1 Understanding IEEE 802.1X Port-Based Authentication  
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized  
clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports. The authentication server authenticates each client  
connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN.  
Until the client is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)  
traffic through the port to which the client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the  
port.  
This section includes this conceptual information:  
• Device Roles  
• Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange  
• Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States  
„
Device Roles  
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below.  
Figure 4-10-1  
z
z
Client—the device (workstation) that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from  
the switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft  
Windows XP operating system. (The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802.1X specification.)  
Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the client. The authentication server validates the  
identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services.  
Because the switch acts as the proxy, the authentication service is transparent to the client. In this release, the Remote  
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)  
extensions is the only supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.  
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the  
RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
z
Switch (802.1X device)—controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client.  
The switch acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the client and the authentication server, requesting identity  
information from the client, verifying that information with the authentication server, and relaying a response to the client.  
The switch includes the RADIUS client, which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible  
Authentication Protocol (EAP) frames and interacting with the authentication server. When the switch receives EAPOL  
frames and relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is  
re-encapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation, and the  
authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format. When the switch receives frames from the  
authentication server, the server's frame header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for  
Ethernet and sent to the client.  
„
Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange  
The switch or the client can initiate authentication. If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port-control auto  
interface configuration command, the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions  
from down to up. It then sends an EAP-request/identity frame to the client to request its identity (typically, the switch sends an  
initial identity/request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information). Upon receipt of the frame, the  
client responds with an EAP-response/identity frame.  
However, if during bootup, the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame from the switch, the client can initiate  
authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the switch to request the client's identity  
If 802.1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device, any EAPOL frames from the  
client are dropped. If the client does not receive an EAP-request/identity frame after three attempts  
to start authentication, the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state. A port in  
the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated.  
When the client supplies its identity, the switch begins its role as the intermediary, passing EAP frames between the client and  
the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the authentication succeeds, the switch port becomes  
authorized.  
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used. “Figure 4-10-1” shows a message  
exchange initiated by the client using the One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-10-2 EAP message exchange  
„
Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States  
The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network. The port starts in the unauthorized  
state. While in this state, the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802.1X protocol packets. When a client is  
successfully authenticated, the port transitions to the authorized state, allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally.  
If a client that does not support 802.1X is connected to an unauthorized 802.1X port, the switch requests the client's identity. In  
this situation, the client does not respond to the request, the port remains in the unauthorized state, and the client is not granted  
access to the network.  
In contrast, when an 802.1X-enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802.1X protocol, the client initiates the  
authentication process by sending the EAPOL-start frame. When no response is received, the client sends the request for a  
fixed number of times. Because no response is received, the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state  
If the client is successfully authenticated (receives an Accept frame from the authentication server), the port state changes to  
authorized, and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port. If the authentication fails, the port remains  
in the unauthorized state, but authentication can be retried. If the authentication server cannot be reached, the switch can  
retransmit the request. If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts, authentication fails,  
and network access is not granted.  
When a client logs off, it sends an EAPOL-logoff message, causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state.  
If the link state of a port transitions from up to down, or if an EAPOL-logoff frame is received, the port returns to the unauthorized  
state.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.2 802.1X System Configuration  
This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802.1X and MAC-based authentication system and port settings.  
The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a port-based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by  
requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication. A central server, the RADIUS server, determines whether the user is  
allowed access to the network.  
MAC-based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port, and doesn't require the user to  
have special 802.1X software installed on his system. The Managed Switch uses the user's MAC address to authenticate  
against the RADIUS server. Intruders can create counterfeit MAC addresses, which makes MAC-based authentication less  
secure than 802.1X authentication.  
The 802.1X System Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-3 appears.  
Figure 4-10-3 802.1X Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Indicates if 802.1X and MAC-based authentication is globally enabled or disabled  
on the switchstack. If globally disabled, all ports are allowed forwarding of  
frames.  
• Mode  
The IP address of the RADIUS Server expressed in dotted decimal notation. If  
the RADIUS IP changes while the protocol is globally enabled, then all  
ports/clients will get reinitialized.  
• RADIUS IP  
The secret - up to 29 characters long - shared between the RADIUS Server and  
the switchstack.  
• RADIUS Secret  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
If checked, clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the  
• Reauthentication  
Enabled  
Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports can be used  
to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port.  
For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server  
configuration has changed. It does not involve communication between the  
switch and the client, and therefore doesn't imply that a client is still present on a  
port (see Age Period below).  
Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be  
reauthenticated. This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is  
checked. Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds.  
• Reauthentication  
Period  
Determines the time the switch shall wait for the supplicant response before  
retransmitting a packet. Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds. This has  
no effect for MAC-based ports.  
• EAP Timeout  
This setting applies to ports running MAC-based authentication, only.  
Suppose a client is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is  
connected to a port on this switch that runs MAC-based authentication, and  
suppose the client gets successfully authenticated. Now assume that the client  
powers down his PC. What should make the switch forget about the  
authenticated client? Reauthentication will not solve this problem, since this  
doesn't require the client to be present, as discussed under Reauthentication  
Enabled above. The solution is aging of authenticated clients. The Age Period,  
which can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds, works like this:  
A timer is started when the client gets authenticated. After half the age period, the  
switch starts looking for frames sent by the client. If another half age period  
elapses and no frames are seen, the client is considered removed from the  
system, and it will have to authenticate again the next time a frame is seen from  
it. If, on the other hand, the client transmits a frame before the second half of the  
age period expires, the switch will consider the client alive, and leave it  
authenticated, and restart the age timer.  
• Age Period  
This setting applies to ports running MAC-based authentication, only.  
If the RADIUS server denies a client access, or a RADIUS server request times  
out (after 40 seconds with two retries), the client is put on hold in the  
Unauthorized state. In this state, frames from the client will not cause the switch  
to attempt to reauthenticate the client. The Hold Time, which can be set to a  
number between 10 and 1000000 seconds, determines the time after an EAP  
Failure indication or RADIUS timeout that a client is not allowed access.  
• Hold Time  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.3 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication Port Configuration  
When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and  
the switch (i.e., authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication  
server. These parameters are described in this section.  
The 802.1X Port Configuration screen in Figure 4-10-4 appears.  
Figure 4-10-4 802.1X Port Configuration page screenshot  
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns, which are:  
Object  
Description  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The port number for which the configuration below applies.  
• Port  
Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options (only used when  
802.1X or MAC-based authentication is globally enabled):  
• Auto: Requires an 802.1X-aware client (supplicant) to be authorized by the  
authentication server. Clients that are not 802.1X-aware will be denied  
access.  
• Admin State  
• Authorized: Forces the port to grant access to all clients, 802.1X-aware or  
not. The switch transmits an EAPOL Success frame when the port links up.  
• Unauthorized: Forces the port to deny access to all clients, 802.1X-aware  
or not. The switch transmits an EAPOL Failure frame when the port links  
up.  
• MAC-Based: Enables MAC-based authentication on the port. The switch  
doesn't transmit or accept EAPOL frames on the port. Flooded frames and  
broadcast traffic will be transmitted on the port, whether or not clients are  
authenticated on the port, whereas unicast traffic against an unsuccessfully  
authenticated client will be dropped. Clients that are not (yet) successfully  
authenticated will not be allowed to transmit frames of any kind.  
The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:  
• 802.1X Disabled: 802.1X and MAC-based authentication is globally  
disabled.  
• Port State  
• Link Down: 802.1X or MAC-based authentication is enabled, but there is  
no link on the port.  
• Authorized: The port is authorized. This is the case when 802.1X  
authentication is enabled, the port has link, and the Admin State is "Auto"  
and the supplicant is authenticated or the Admin State is "Authorized".  
• Unauthorized: The port is unauthorized. This is the case when 802.1X  
authentication is enabled, the port has link, and the Admin State is "Auto",  
but the supplicant is not (yet) authenticated or the Admin State is  
"Unauthorized".  
• X Auth/Y Unauth: X clients are currently authorized and Y are  
unauthorized. This state is shown when 802.1X and MAC-based  
authentication is globally enabled and the Admin State is set to  
"MAC-Based".  
This setting applies to ports running MAC-based authentication, only.  
The maximum number of clients allowed on a given port can be configured  
through the list-box and edit-control for this setting. Choosing the value "All" from  
the list-box allows the port to consume up to 104 client state-machines. Choosing  
the value "Specific" from the list-box opens up for entering a specific number of  
maximum clients on the port (1 to 104).  
• Max Clients  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The stackswitch is "born" with a pool of state-machines, from which all ports draw  
whenever a new client is seen on the port. When a given port's maximum is  
reached (both authorized and unauthorized clients count), further new clients are  
disallowed access. Since all ports draw from the same pool, it may happen that a  
configured maximum cannot be granted, if the remaining ports have already used  
all available state-machines.  
Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when  
authentication is globally enabled and the port's Admin State is "Auto" or  
"MAC-Based".  
• Restart  
Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.  
• Reauthenticate: Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the  
quiet-period of the port runs out (port-based authentication). For  
MAC-based authentication, reauthentication will be attempted immediately.  
The button only has effect for successfully authenticated ports/clients and will not  
cause the port/client to get temporarily unauthorized.  
• Reinitialize: Forces a reinitialization of the port/clients and thereby a  
reauthentication immediately. The port/clients will transfer to the  
unauthorized state while the reauthentication is ongoing.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.4 802.1X Port Status  
This page provides an overview of the current IEEE 802.1X port states for the selected switch. The 802.1X Port Status screen in  
Figure 4-10-5 appears.  
Figure 4-10-5 802.1X Status page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number. Click to navigate to detailed 802.1X statistics for this  
port.  
• Port  
The current state of the port. Refer to IEEE 802.1X Port State for a description of  
the individual states.  
• State  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for  
port-based authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new  
client for MAC-based authentication.  
• Last Source  
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Resp/ID  
• Last ID  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
EAPOL frame for port-based authentication, and the source MAC address from  
the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based  
authentication.  
4.10.5 802.1X and MAC-Based Authentication Statistics  
This page provides detailed IEEE 802.1X statistics for a specific switch port running port-based authentication. For MAC-based  
ports, it shows selected RADIUS statistics, only. Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed. The 802.1X  
and MAC-Based Authentication Statistics screen in Figure 4-10-6 appears.  
Figure 4-10-6 802.1X Statistics Port 1 page screenshot  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the table header.  
„
EAPOL Counters  
These counters are not available for MAC-based ports.  
Supplicant frame counter statistics. There are seven receive frame counters and three transmit frame counters.  
EAPOL Counters  
Direction  
Name  
IEEE Name  
Description  
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have  
been received by the switch.  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Tx  
Tx  
Tx  
Total  
dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx  
The number of valid EAP Resp/ID frames that have been  
received by the switch.  
Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespIdFramesRx  
The number of valid EAPOL response frames (other than  
Resp/ID frames) that have been received by the switch.  
Responses  
Start  
dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx  
dot1xAuthEapolStartFramesRx  
dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx  
dot1xAuthInvalidEapolFramesRx  
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received  
by the switch.  
The number of valid EAPOL logoff frames that have been  
received by the switch.  
Logoff  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by  
the switch in which the frame type is not recognized.  
Invalid Type  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by  
the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.  
Invalid Length dot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx  
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been  
transmitted by the switch.  
Total  
dot1xAuthEapolFramesTx  
The number of EAP initial request frames that have been  
transmitted by the switch.  
Request ID  
Requests  
dot1xAuthEapolReqIdFramesTx  
dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx  
The number of valid EAP Request frames (other than initial  
request frames) that have been transmitted by the switch.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
RADIUS Counters  
RADIUS Server frame counter statistics.  
For MAC-based ports there are two tables containing RADIUS counters. The left-most shows a summary of all RADIUS  
counters on this port. The right-most shows RADIUS counters for the currently selected client, or dashes if no client is  
selected or available. A client can be selected from the list of authorized/unauthorized clients below the two counter tables.  
There are slight differences in the interpretation of the counters between port- and MAC-based authentication as shown  
below.  
RADIUS Counters  
Direction  
Name  
IEEE Name  
Description  
Port-based:  
Counts the number of times that the switch receives the first  
request from the RADIUS server following the first response  
from the supplicant. Indicates that the RADIUS server has  
communication with the switch.  
dot1xAuthBackendAccessCh  
allenges  
Rx  
Access Challenges  
MAC-based:  
Counts all Access Challenges received from the RADIUS  
server for this port (left-most table) or client (right-most  
table).  
Port-based:  
Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP  
dot1xAuthBackendOtherRequ Request packet following the first to the supplicant. Indicates  
Rx  
Other Requests  
estsToSupplicant  
that the RADIUS server chose an EAP-method.  
MAC-based:  
Not applicable.  
Port- and MAC-based:  
dot1xAuthBackendAuthSucce Counts the number of times that the switch receives a  
Rx  
Rx  
Auth. Successes  
Auth. Failures  
sses  
success indication. Indicates that the supplicant/client has  
successfully authenticated to the RADIUS server.  
Port- and MAC-based:  
Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure  
message. This indicates that the supplicant/client has not  
authenticated to the RADIUS server.  
dot1xAuthBackendAuthFails  
Port-based:  
Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send  
a supplicant's first response packet to the RADIUS server.  
Indicates the switch attempted communication with the  
RADIUS server. Possible retransmissions are not counted.  
dot1xAuthBackendResponse  
s
Tx  
Responses  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
MAC-based:  
Counts all the RADIUS packets sent from the switch towards  
the RADIUS server for a given port (left-most table) or client  
(right-most table). Possible retransmissions are not counted.  
„
Last Supplicant/Client Info  
For MAC-based ports, this section is embedded in the RADIUS counter's section.  
Information about the last supplicant/client that attempted to authenticate.  
Last Supplicant/Client Info  
Name  
IEEE Name  
Description  
Port-based:  
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received  
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrame  
Version  
Version  
EAPOL frame.  
MAC-based:  
Not applicable.  
Port-based:  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received  
dot1xAuthLastEapolFrame  
Source  
Source  
EAPOL frame.  
MAC-based:  
Not applicable.  
Port-based:  
The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently  
received Resp/ID EAPOL frame.  
Identity  
-
MAC-based:  
or (Last) Client  
The MAC address of the last client that attempted to authenticate  
(left-most table), or the MAC address of the currently selected  
client (right-most table).  
„
Clients attached to this port  
This table is only available for MAC-based ports  
Each row in the table represents a MAC-based client on the port, and there are three parameters for each client:  
• MAC Address: Shows the MAC address of the client, which is also used as the password in theauthentication  
process against the RADIUS server. Clicking the link causes the client's RADIUS counters to be shown in the  
right-most RADIUS counters table above. If no clients are attached, it shows No clients attached.  
• State: Shows whether the client is authorized or unauthorized. As long as the RADIUS server hasn't successfully  
authenticated a client, it is unauthorized.  
Last Authentication: Show the date and time of the last authentication of the client. This gets updated for every  
re-authentication of the client.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.10.6 Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration  
1. Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch. In this case, field in the default IP  
Address of the Managed Switch with 192.168.0.100. And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one  
you had set at the switch RADIUS server – 12345678 at this case.  
Figure 4-10-7 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting  
2. Configure ports attribute of 802.1X, the same as “802.1X Port Configuration”.  
Figure 4-10-8 802.1x Port Configuration  
3. Create user data. That step are different of “Local Authenticate”, the establishment of the user data needs to be  
created on the Radius Server PC. For example, the Radius Server founded on Win2000 Server, and then:  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-10-9 Windows Server RADIUS Server setting path  
5.  
Enter ” Active Directory Users and Computers”, create legal user data, the next, right-click a user what you created to  
enter properties, and what to be noticed:  
Figure 4-10-10 TsInternetUser Properties screen  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Set the Ports Authenticate Status to “Force Authorized” if the port is connected to the RADIUS  
server or the port is a uplink port that is connected to another switch. Or once the 802.1X stat to  
work, the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server.  
4.10.7 802.1X Client Configuration  
Windows XP is originally 802.1X support. As to other operating systems (windows 98SE, ME, 2000), an 802.1X client utility is  
needed. The following procedures show how to configure 802.1X Authentication in Windows XP.  
Please note that if you want to change the 802.1x authentication type of a wireless client, i.e. switch to EAP-TLS from EAP-MD5,  
you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first, and add it in again.  
„ Configure Sample: EAP-MD5 Authentication  
1. Go to Start > Control Panel, double-click on “Network Connections”.  
2. Right-click on the Local Network Connection.  
3. Click “Properties” to open up the Properties setting window.  
Figure 4-10-11  
4. Select “Authentication” tab.  
5. Select “Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1X” to enable 802.1x authentication.  
6. Select “MD-5 Challenge” from the drop-down list box for EAP type.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-10-12  
7. Click “OK”.  
8. When client has associated with the Managed Switch, a user authentication notice appears in system tray. Click on the  
notice to continue.  
Figure 4-10-13  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
9. Enter the user name, password and the logon domain that your account belongs.  
10. Click “OK” to complete the validation process.  
Figure 4-10-14  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11 Access Control Lists  
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify individual  
users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.  
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object  
access rights.  
ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In networking,  
the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with a list of hosts or  
servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic, and in this context,  
they are similar to firewalls.  
ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.  
There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE also  
contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.  
4.11.1 Access Control List Configuration  
This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined for this Managed Switch. Each row  
describes the ACE that is defined.  
„
„
The maximum number of ACEs is 128.  
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list.  
The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-1 appears.  
Figure 4-11-1 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:  
• Any: The ACE will match any ingress port.  
• Ingress Port  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
• Policy: The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy.  
• Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.  
Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:  
• Any: The ACE will match any frame type.  
• Frame Type  
• EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames.  
• ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.  
• IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.  
• IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.  
• IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.  
• IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.  
• IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not  
ICMP/UDP/TCP.  
Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.  
• Action  
• Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.  
• Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.  
Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 15. When  
Disabled is displayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.  
Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are  
copied to the port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port  
number. When Disabled is displayed, the port copy operation is disabled.  
Indicates the logging operation of the ACE. Possible values are:  
• Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.  
• Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.  
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.  
Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE. Possible values are:  
• Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.  
• Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.  
• Rate Limiter  
• Port Copy  
• Logging  
• Shutdown  
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.  
• Counter  
• Modification Buttons  
You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following  
buttons:  
: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.  
: Edits the ACE row.  
: Moves the ACE up the list.  
: Moves the ACE down the list.  
: Deletes the ACE.  
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.2 ACE Configuration  
Configure an ACE (Access Control Entry) on this page.  
An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select. First select the  
ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type. Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type  
that you selected.  
A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here.  
Object  
Description  
Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.  
Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
• Ingress Port  
Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.  
Policy n: The ACE applies to this policy number, where n can range from 1 through 8.  
Select the switch to which this ACE applies.  
• Switch  
Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
Switch n: The ACE applies to this switch number, where n is the number of the switch.  
Select the frame type for this ACE.  
• Frame Type  
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.  
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE.  
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE.  
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE.  
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.  
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.  
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.  
• Action  
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 15. Disabled  
indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.  
• Rate Limiter  
Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here. The allowed  
range is the same as the switch port number range. Disabled indicates that the port  
copy operation is disabled.  
• Port Copy  
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.  
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.  
• Logging  
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.  
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.  
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.  
• Shutdown  
The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.  
• Counter  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
MAC Parameters  
Object  
Description  
(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)  
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.  
• SMAC Filter  
Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)  
Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this  
value. A field for entering an SMAC value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC  
address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE matches  
this SMAC value.  
• SMAC Value  
Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.  
• DMAC Filter  
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)  
MC: Frame must be multicast.  
BC: Frame must be broadcast.  
UC: Frame must be unicast.  
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose  
this value. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination  
MAC address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx". A frame that hits this ACE  
matches this DMAC value.  
• DMAC Value  
„
VLAN Parameters  
Object  
Description  
Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.  
• VLAN ID Filter  
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)  
Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value.  
A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN  
ID number. The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches  
this VLAN ID value.  
• VLAN ID  
Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag  
priority. The allowed number range is 0 to 7. The value Any means that no tag  
priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)  
• Tag Priority  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
ARP Parameters  
The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.  
Object  
Description  
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.  
• Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)  
• ARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to ARP.  
• RARP: Frame must have ARP/RARP opcode set to RARP.  
• Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.  
Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.  
• Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)  
• Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.  
• Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.  
Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.  
• ARP/RARP  
• Request/Reply  
• Sender IP Filter  
• Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)  
• Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP  
Address field that appears.  
• Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and  
sender IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.  
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a  
specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation.  
• Sender IP Address  
• Sender IP Mask  
• Target IP Filter  
When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific  
sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation.  
Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.  
• Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)  
• Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target  
IP Address field that appears.  
• Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address and  
target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.  
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a  
specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation.  
• Target IP Address  
• Target IP Mask  
When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target  
IP mask in dotted decimal notation.  
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware  
address field (SHA) settings.  
• ARP SMAC Match  
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.  
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.  
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware  
• RARP SMAC Match  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
address field (THA) settings.  
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address.  
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address.  
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP  
hardware address length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.  
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN)  
is equal to IPv4 (0x04) must not match this entry.  
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN)  
is equal to IPv4 (0x04) must match this entry.  
• IP/Ethernet Length  
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP  
hardware address space (HRD) settings.  
• IP  
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1) must not match  
this entry.  
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1) must match this  
entry.  
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol  
address space (PRO) settings.  
• Ethernet  
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800) must not match  
this entry.  
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800) must match this  
entry.  
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
„
IP Parameters  
The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.  
Object  
Description  
Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.  
• IP Protocol Filter  
• Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").  
• Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose  
this value. A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.  
• ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for  
defining ICMP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this  
help file.  
• UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining  
UDP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.  
• TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
TCP parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.  
When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific  
value.. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP  
protocol value.  
• IP Protocol Value  
Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.  
• IP TTL  
• zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able  
to match this entry.  
• non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be  
able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the  
More Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an  
IPv4 frame.  
• IP Fragment  
• No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater  
than zero must not be able to match this entry.  
• Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater  
than zero must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.  
• IP Option  
• No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this  
entry.  
• Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this  
entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.  
• SIP Filter  
• Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)  
• Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP  
Address field that appears.  
• Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and  
source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.  
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a  
specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation.  
• SIP Address  
• SIP Mask  
• DIP Filter  
When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP  
mask in dotted decimal notation.  
Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.  
• Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)  
• Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in  
the DIP Address field that appears.  
• Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that  
appear.  
When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a  
specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation.  
• DIP Address  
When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific  
DIP mask in dotted decimal notation.  
• DIP Mask  
„
ICMP Parameters  
Object  
Description  
Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.  
• ICMP Type Filter  
• Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").  
• Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can  
enter a specific ICMP value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP  
value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this  
ICMP value.  
• ICMP Type Value  
Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.  
• ICMP Code Filter  
• Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").  
• Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you  
can enter a specific ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value  
appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific  
ICMP code value. The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE  
matches this ICMP code value.  
• ICMP Code Value  
„
TCP/UDP Parameters  
Object  
Description  
Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.  
• TCP/UDP Source Filter  
• Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is  
"don't-care").  
• Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE,  
you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a  
TCP/UDP source value appears.  
• Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this  
ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for  
entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a  
specific TCP/UDP source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that  
• TCP/UDP Source No.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.  
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific  
TCP/UDP source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits  
this ACE matches this TCP/UDP source value.  
• TCP/UDP Source  
Range  
Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.  
• TCP/UDP Destination  
Filter  
• Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter  
status is "don't-care").  
• Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this  
ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering  
a TCP/UDP destination value appears.  
• Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this  
ACE, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for  
entering a TCP/UDP destination value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a  
specific TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame  
that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.  
• TCP/UDP Destination  
Number  
When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a  
specific TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A  
frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP/UDP destination value.  
Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.  
• 0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.  
• 1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
• TCP/UDP Destination  
Range  
• TCP FIN  
• TCP SYN  
• TCP PSH  
• TCP ACK  
• TCP URG  
Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.  
• 0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.  
• 1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.  
• 0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.  
• 1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.  
• 0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.  
• 1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.  
• 0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.  
• 1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.  
• Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Ethernet Type Parameters  
The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" is selected.  
Object  
Description  
Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.  
• EtherType Filter  
Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").  
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can  
enter a specific EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.  
When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific  
EtherType value. The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF. A frame that hits this  
ACE matches this EtherType value.  
• Ethernet Type Value  
4.11.3 ACL Configuration wizard  
This handy wizard helps you set up an ACL quickly.  
The ACL Configuration wizard screen in Figure 4-11-2 appears.  
Figure 4-11-2 welcome to the ACL Configuration wizard page screenshot  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Set up the default policy rules for Client ports, Server ports, Network ports and  
Guest ports.  
• Set up Policy Rules  
Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies.  
• Set up Port Policies  
Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control.  
• Set up Typical Network  
Application Rules  
Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the  
source IP and source MAC on specific port.  
• Set up Source MAC  
and Source IP Binding  
• Set up DoS Attack  
Detection Rules  
Set up the specific ACL to detect DoS attack.  
4.11.3.1 Set up Policy Rules  
Set up the default policy rules for Client ports, Server ports, Network ports, and Guest ports.  
Policy 2 for client ports: Limit the allowed rate of broadcast and multicast frames.  
Policy 3 for server ports: Common server access only. (DHCP, FTP, Mail, and WEB server)  
Policy 4 for network ports: Limit the allowed rate of TCP SYN flooding and ICMP flooding.  
Policy 5 for guest ports: Internet access only.  
The screen in Figure 4-11-3 appears.  
Figure 4-11-3 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.3.2 Set up Port Policies  
Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies.  
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The screen in Figure 4-11-4 appears.  
Figure 4-11-4 Set up Port Policies page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Frames that hit this ACE are set to match this specific policy.  
• Policy ID  
A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each Policy ID. To include a  
port in a policy member, click the radio button.  
• Port Members  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.3.3 Set up Typical Network Application Rules  
Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control. The screen in Figure 4-11-5 appears.  
„
STEP-1: Selecting the Network Application Type:  
Figure 4-11-5 Set up Typical network Application Rules page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Indicates the common servers that applies to the specific ACE. The common  
servers are: DHCP, DNS, FTP, HTTP, IMAP, NFS, POP3, SAMBA, SMTP,  
TELNET, TFTP.  
• Common Servers  
Indicates the instant messaging service that applies to the specific ACE. The  
instant messengers are: Google Talk, MSN Messenger, Yahoo Messenger.  
Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific ACE. The user definitions  
are:  
• Instant Messaging  
• User Definition  
• Ethernet Type: Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this ACE. The allowed  
range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF.  
• UDP Port: Specify the UDP destination port filter for this ACE. The allowed  
range is 0 to 65535.  
• TCP Port: Specify the TCP destination port filter for this ACE. The allowed  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
range is 0 to 65535.  
Indicates the other application that applies to the specific ACE. The other  
applications are: HTTPS, ICMP, Multicast IP Stream, NetBIOS, PING Request,  
Ping Reply, SNMP, SNMP Traps.  
• Others  
„
STEP-2: Define and Apply the Typeical Netowrk Application Rules:  
According to your decision on the previous page, this wizard will create specific ACEs (Access Control Entries) automatically.  
First select the ingress port for the ACEs, and then select the action, rate limiter ID, logging and shutdown.  
Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected.  
The screen in Figure 4-11-6 appears.  
Figure 4-11-6 XXXXXXX page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Select the ingress port to which this ACE applies.  
• Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
• Ingress Port  
• Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the  
switch port.  
• Policy n: The ACE applies to this policy number, where n can range from 1  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
through 8.  
Select the switch to which this ACE applies.  
• Switch  
• Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
• Switch n: The ACE applies to this switch number, where n is the number of  
the switch.  
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.  
• Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE  
operation.  
• Action  
• Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.  
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 15.  
Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.  
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
• Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.  
• Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.  
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.  
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
• Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.  
• Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.  
• Rate Limiter  
• Logging  
• Shutdown  
The ACL configuration wizard is finished, and the new configuration is ready for use.  
Figure 4-11-7 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.3.4 Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding  
Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source IP and source MAC on specific port.  
The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The screen in Figure 4-11-8 appears.  
Figure 4-11-8 Set up Source MAC and Secure IP Binding page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port  
Enable or disable the source IP and source MAC binding status for the given  
logical port.  
• Binding Enabled  
The source MAC address for the source IP and source MAC binding.  
• Source MAC Address  
The source IP address for the source IP and source MAC binding.  
• Source IP Address  
The ACL configuration wizard is finished, and the new configuration is ready for use.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-11-9  
4.11.3.5 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules  
Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control.  
The screen in Figure 4-11-10 appears.  
Figure 4-11-10 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
A malicious attacker sending a large number of UDP packets with random ports  
to the target system. When the target system receives these packets, it will  
determine what application is waiting on the destination port. When it realizes  
that there is no application that is waiting on the port, it will generate an ICMP  
• UDP DoS - Fraggle  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
packet of destination unreachable to the spoofed source address. Eventually  
leading it to be unreachable by other clients and the system will go down.  
A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet larger than the  
65,536 bytes to the target system. Some target systems cannot handle the  
packet larger than the maximum IP packet size, which often causes target  
system froze, crashed or rebooted.  
• ICMP DoS - Ping of  
Death  
A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet with broadcast  
destination addresses to the target system. After receiving the packet, all  
reachable hosts send an ICMP echo reply packet back to the spoofed source  
address. Thus, the target host will suffer from a larger amount of traffic  
generated.  
• ICMP DoS - Smurf  
4.11.3.6 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules  
According to your decision on the previous page, this wizard will create specific ACEs (Access Control Entries) automatically.  
First select the ingress port for the ACEs, and then select the action, rate limiter ID, logging and shutdown.  
Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected.  
Figure 4-11-11 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Object  
Description  
Select the ingress port to which this ACE applies.  
• Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
• Ingress Port  
• Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the  
switch port.  
• Policy n: The ACE applies to this policy number, where n can range from 1  
through 8.  
Select the switch to which this ACE applies.  
• Switch  
• Any: The ACE applies to any port.  
• Switch n: The ACE applies to this switch number, where n is the number of  
the switch.  
Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.  
• Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE  
operation.  
• Action  
• Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.  
Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 15.  
Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.  
Specify the logging operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
• Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.  
• Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.  
Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:  
• Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.  
• Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.  
• Rate Limiter  
• Logging  
• Shutdown  
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.  
The ACL configuration wizard is finished, and the new configuration is ready for use.  
Figure 4-11-12  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.4 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration  
Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch.  
The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-13 appears.  
Figure 4-11-13 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Rate Limiter ID  
The rate unit is packet per second (pps), configure the rate as 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,  
64, 128, 256, 512, 1K, 2K, 4K, 8K, 16K, 32K, 64K, 128K, 256K, 512K, or  
1024K.  
• Rate  
The 1 kpps is actually 1002.1 pps.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.11.5 ACL Ports Configuration  
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the  
frame matches a specific ACE. The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4-11-14 appears.  
Figure 4-11-14 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.  
• Port  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 1 through 8. The  
default value is 1.  
• Policy ID  
• Action  
Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default  
value is "Permit".  
Select which rate limiter to apply to this port. The allowed values are Disabled  
or the values 1 through 15. The default value is "Disabled".  
Select which port frames are copied to. The allowed values are Disabled or a  
specific port number. The default value is "Disabled".  
Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:  
• Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.  
• Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.  
The default value is "Disabled".  
• Rate Limiter ID  
• Port Copy  
• Logging  
Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.  
Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:  
Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.  
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.  
• Shutdown  
The default value is "Disabled".  
Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.  
• Counter  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.12 Address Table  
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps  
MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to ( based upon the DMAC address in the frame ).  
This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the  
administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.  
The frames also contain a MAC address ( SMAC address ), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame.  
The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic  
entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable  
age time.  
4.12.1 MAC Address Table Configuration  
The MAC Address Table is configured on this page. Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static  
MAC table here. The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-1 appears.  
Figure 4-12-1 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot  
Aging Configuration  
Object  
Description  
Enables/disables the the automatic aging of dynamic entries  
• Disable Automatic  
Aging  
The time after which a learned entry is discarded. By default, dynamic entries are  
removed from the MAC after 300 seconds. This removal is also called aging.  
(Range: 10-10000000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)  
• Aging Time  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.12.2 Static MAC Table Configuration  
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain 64 entries.  
The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack, and not per switch.  
The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address.  
The Static MAC Table Configuration screen in Figure 4-12-2 appears.  
Figure 4-12-2 Static MAC Table Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.  
• Delete  
The VLAN ID for the entry.  
• VLAN ID  
The MAC address for the entry.  
• MAC Address  
• Port Members  
Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as  
needed to modify the entry.  
Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID, MAC  
address, and port members for the new entry. Click "Save".  
• Adding a New Static  
Entry  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.12.3 MAC Address Table Status  
Dynamic MAC Table  
Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries, and is sorted first by VLAN  
ID, then by MAC address.  
Figure 4-12-3 MAC Address Table Status  
Navigating the MAC Table  
Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input  
field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed  
will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.  
The "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table.  
Clicking the “Refresh” button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match.  
In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing  
for continuous refresh with the same start address.  
The “>>” will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN/MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup. When the  
end is reached the text "no more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the “|<<”button to start over.  
MAC Table Columns  
Object  
Description  
Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry.  
• Type  
The VLAN ID of the entry.  
• VLAN  
The MAC address of the entry.  
The ports that are members of the entry.  
• MAC address  
• Port Members  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Buttons  
Auto-refresh □ : Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals.  
Refreshe: Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "Start from MAC address" and "VLAN" input fields.  
Clear : Flushes all dynamic entries.  
|<<: Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table, i.e. the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address.  
>>|: Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.13 Port Security (To be Continued)  
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized  
to access the network through that port.  
When port security is enabled on a port, the Managed Switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it  
has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static  
address table will be authorized to access the network through that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts  
to use the switch port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and  
sending a trap message.  
<source MAC address, VLAN> pair for frames received on the port.  
Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table. The selected port will stop  
learning. The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out. Any other device that attempts to  
use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch.  
MAC Table Learning  
Figure 4-13-1 Port Security Settings screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is  
• Auto  
received.  
No learning is done.  
• Disable  
Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.  
• Secure  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before  
changing to secure learning mode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be  
restored by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial  
interface.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.14 LLDP  
4.14.1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol  
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast  
domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device. Advertised  
information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details  
such as device identification, capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information  
gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.  
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an extension of LLDP intended for managing  
endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as  
network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP  
applications to simplify troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.14.2 LLDP Configuration  
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings. The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure  
4-14-1 appears.  
Figure 4-14-1 LLDP Configuration page screenshot  
„
LLDP Parameters  
Object  
• Tx Interval  
Description  
The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the  
network discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP  
frame is determined by the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 -  
32768 seconds.  
Default: 30 seconds  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
This attribute must comply with the following rule:  
(Transmission Interval * Hold Time Multiplier) ≤65536, and Transmission Interval  
>= (4 * Delay Interval)  
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the  
LLDP frame shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to  
Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10  
times.  
• Tx Hold  
TTL in seconds is based on the following rule:  
(Transmission Interval * Holdtime Multiplier) ≤ 65536.  
Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.  
If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is  
transmitted, but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the  
value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval  
value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192 seconds.  
• Tx Delay  
This attribute must comply with the rule:  
(4 * Delay Interval) ≤Transmission Interval  
When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP  
shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP  
information isn't valid anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds  
between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization. Valid values are  
restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.  
• Tx Reinit  
„
4.14.2.2 LLDP Port Configuration  
The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
Object  
Description  
The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.  
• Port  
Select LLDP mode.  
• Mode  
• Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information  
from neighbor units is analyzed.  
• Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but  
will send out LLDP information.  
• Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP  
information received from neighbors.  
• Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP  
information received from neighbors.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP  
• Port Descr  
• Sys Name  
• Sys Descr  
• Sys Capa  
information transmitted.  
Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information  
transmitted.  
Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP  
information transmitted.  
Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP  
information transmitted.  
The system capabilities identifies the primary function(s) of the system and  
whether or not these primary functions are enabled. The information advertised  
by this TLV is described in IEEE 802.1AB.  
Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP  
information transmitted.  
• Mgmt Addr  
The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the  
switch. If no management address is available, the address should be the MAC  
address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement. The management  
address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated  
with this address, and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware  
component or protocol entity associated with this address  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.14.3 LLDP Neighbor  
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors. The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an  
LLDP neighbor is detected. The LLDP Neighbor screen in Figure 4-14-3 appears.  
Figure 4-14-3 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot  
The columns hold the following information:  
Object  
Description  
The port on which the LLDP frame was received.  
• Local Port  
The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor's LLDP frames.  
The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port.  
System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit.  
Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit.  
• Chassis ID  
• Remote Port ID  
• System Name  
• Port Description  
• System Capabilities  
System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit's capabilities. The possible  
capabilities are:  
1. Other  
2. Repeater  
3. Bridge  
4. WLAN Access Point  
5. Router  
6. Telephone  
7. DOCSIS cable device  
8. Station only  
9. Reserved  
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is  
disabled, the capability is followed by (-).  
Management Address is the neighbor unit's address that is used for higher  
layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management. This could for  
instance hold the neighbor's IP address.  
• Management Address  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.14.4 LLDP Statistics  
This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic. Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to  
the whole stack, switch, while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch. The LLDP Statistics screen in  
Figure 4-14-4 appears.  
Figure 4-14-4 LLDP Statistics page screenshot  
„
Global Counters  
Object  
Description  
Shows the time for when the last entry was last deleted or added. It is also shows  
the time elapsed since last change was detected.  
Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.  
• Neighbor entries were  
last changed at  
• Total Neighbors  
Entries Added  
Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.  
• Total Neighbors  
Entries Deleted  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full.  
Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.  
• Total Neighbors  
Entries Dropped  
• Total Neighbors  
Entries Aged Out  
„
Local Counters  
The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:  
Object  
Description  
The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.  
• Local Port  
The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.  
The number of LLDP frames received on the port.  
• Tx Frames  
• Rx Frames  
• Rx Errors  
The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.  
If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full,  
the LLDP frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many  
Neighbors" in the LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table  
when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table.  
Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down, an LLDP  
shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.  
• Frames Discarded  
Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs  
(TLV is short for "Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and  
discarded.  
• TLVs Discarded  
The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.  
• TLVs Unrecognized  
• Org. Discarded  
• Age-Outs  
The number of organizationally TLVs received.  
Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP  
information is valid (age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the  
age out time, the LLDP information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is  
incremented.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.15 Network Diagnastics  
4.15.1 Cable Diagnostics  
This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics.  
Press to run the diagnostics. This will take approximately 5 seconds. If all ports are selected, this can take approximately 15  
seconds. When completed, the page refreshes automatically, and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status  
table. Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 - 140 meters.  
10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic. Therefore, running cable diagnastic on a 10 or 100  
Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete. The ports belong to the currently  
selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.  
Figure 4-15-1 Cable Diagnostics page screenshot  
Object  
Description  
The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.  
• Port  
Port: Port number.  
• Cable Status  
Pair: The status of the cable pair.  
Length: The length (in meters) of the cable pair.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.15.2 Ping  
This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues.  
After you press , 5 ICMP packets are transmitted, and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of  
a reply. The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received, or until a timeout occurs. The ICMP Ping  
screen in Figure 4-15-1 appears.  
Figure 4-15-1 ICMP Ping page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
The destination IP Address.  
• IP Address  
The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes.  
• Ping Size  
Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch, or you had setup the  
correct gateway IP address.  
After field the parameter and press “Start” to execute the Ping function. The Ping result shows at the next tabl  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16 Stacking – SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Using Stacking, it is possible to connect a number of switches together in a stack, which behaves as a single switch as seen  
from outside the stack.  
Two types of stack topologies are supported:  
„
„
Ring topology  
Chain topology (same as a disconnected ring)  
Multiple PLANET SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R devices may be connected together to constitute a ring or chain stack  
topology using the STX / 5Gbps ports as interconnect links. Dedicated stacking features built into SGSW-24040 /  
SGSW-24040R makes all devices in the stack operate together as a single, much larger switch. Among the stacking features  
are:  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Hardware controlled stack wide learning and continuous automatic MAC table synchronization  
Shortest path forwarding, providing low latency and optimal use of stacking link bandwidth  
QoS consistency across stack  
Single point of management for simple stack administration  
Low Cost and Flexible HDMI-like Stacking cables  
Real Plug and Play connectivity  
The following figure shows an example with five devices in a ring topology stack. Each device in the stack is, in a stack context,  
called a unit. The ports connecting the units are called stack ports, and the ports connecting to external hosts and switches are  
called front ports.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Chain Stack: A chain of switches, that is, no redundant forwarding paths.  
Figure 4-16-1 Chain Stack topology  
„
Ring Stack: A ring of switches, thereby providing redundant forwarding paths.  
Figure 4-16-2 Ring Stack topology  
„
Back-to-Back Stack : Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports.  
Figure 4-16-3 Back to back Stack topology  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16.1 Stack  
This section provides information for understand stacking architecture, include the below items:  
„
Switch IDs  
• Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs  
• Removing a Switch From the Stack  
• Replacing a Switch  
• General Switch ID Assignment Rules  
Master Election  
„
„
„
Stack Redundancy  
Shortest Path Forwarding  
4.16.1.1 Switch IDs  
The Switch ID (1-16) assigned to a SGSW Switch.  
„
Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs  
When a switch is added to the stack, a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch. The automatic SID assignment can  
be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page. This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned  
so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch.  
The Switch IDs of two switches can be swapped by simply interchanging the values in the Switch ID column.  
Changing Switch IDs does not result in any interruption of the stack operation.  
„
Removing a Switch From the Stack  
When a switch is removed from the stack, the configuration for the switch is preserved, and the switch still appears on the  
Stack Configuration page. If the configuration of the switch is not to be transferred to another switch, then the configuration  
may be deleted by choosing Delete, followed by "Save".  
„
Replacing a Switch  
If a switch is to be replaced with another switch (for example, replacing failing hardware), the following procedure must be  
used to assign the configuration of the failing switch to the new hardware:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Remove the failing switch from the stack. For example, assume that the failing switch had Switch ID 3.  
Insert the new switch into the stack. The new switch is assigned an unused Switch ID.  
To remove the automatic switch ID assignment, choose "Delete", followed by "Save". The new switch is then  
shown with Switch ID set to "-".  
4.  
To assign the configuration of Switch ID 3 to the new hardware, simply choose 3 in the Switch ID column and click  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
"Save".  
The new hardware has now taken over the configuration of the failing hardware.  
5.  
„
General Switch ID Assignment Rules  
When assigning Switch IDs to the devices in the stack, you must note the following:  
1.  
Switches with assigned IDs can be changed to use any other switch ID (possibly by swapping Switch ID with  
another active switch).  
2.  
3.  
4.  
When swapping two Switch IDs, the devices will retain their (own) configuration, except for the Switch ID.  
Switches without an assigned Switch ID can only be assigned to any unused ID.  
When assigning a Switch ID of an inactive switch to a new switch, the new switch will inherit the former's  
configuration (see "Replacing a Switch" above).  
5.  
6.  
Deleting a switch will remove any configuration pertaining to it.  
Deleting an active switch will leave it with an unassigned Switch ID until rebooted or manually assigning a Switch  
ID.  
4.16.1.2 Master Election  
Within a managed stack, one master switch (or just "master") must be elected. Any switch not being master is a slave switch (or  
just "slave").  
To elect a master, the following criteria are evaluated sequentially:  
1. If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30 seconds, then that switch will become  
master.  
2. If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds, then the switch which has been  
master for the longest period of time will become master.  
3. The switch with the smallest master priority.  
4. The switch with the smallest MAC address.  
The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been master for more than 30 seconds, it will remain  
master. However in some cases the user may want to enforce a new master election.  
4.16.1.3 Stack Redundancy  
In the unlikely event that a SGSW Switch fails in a stack, stack integrity is maintained if the redundant cable is connected to the  
stack. The affected switch within the sack can be replaced or removed without disrupting normal operation. The broken link is  
bypassed and data transmission continues uninterrupted. The single management IP address for the stack is also preserved for  
uninterrupted management and monitoring.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-16-4 Remove or Replace a switch from the stack  
4.16.1.4 Shortest Path Forwarding  
The SGSW Swtich supports shortest path forwarding technology to optimal data flow across the stack. The advantage of  
shortest path forwarding as below:  
„
„
Automatic Loop Prevention – Using Time To Live (TTL) information in the stack-header  
Utilize all stack links in the ring.  
Figure 4-16-5 True Ring Topology  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16.2 Stack Configuration  
This page is used for configure the stack, include assign Switch ID, master priority and display the current stack member  
information. The screen in Figure 4-16-6appears.  
Figure 4-16-6 Stack Configuration page screenshot  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Deletes this switch from the stack configuration.  
• Delete  
The MAC address of the switch.  
• Stack Member  
The Switch ID (1-16) assigned to a switch. For more information, see description  
of Switch IDs  
• Switch ID  
Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master. An unmanaged switch, for  
example, will not be Master Capable.  
• Master Capable  
The priority that the switch has in the master election process.  
The smaller the priority, the more likely the switch will become master during the  
master election process.  
• Master Priority  
The product name of the switch.  
• Switch Type  
By checking this option, the "Save" operation will also start the master election  
process.  
• Start Master Election  
This is done by clicking "Start Master Election", followed by "Save". This causes  
the first two criteria to be ignored, thereby basing master election only on master  
priority and MAC address. When master election is enforced, the first two criteria  
are ignored for a period of 10-15 seconds.  
On the Stack State Monitor web page, this is shown by "Reelect" being set to "Yes" for one of the switches in the stack.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16.3 Stack Information  
This page provides an overview of the stack topology, as detected by SPROUT.  
„
Stack Topology  
The Stack Topology screen in Figure 4-16-7 appears.  
Figure 4-16-7 Stack Information page screenshot - Stack Topology  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Specifies the type of topology for the stack:  
• Stack Topology  
• Chain: A chain of switches, that is, no redundant forwarding paths.  
• Ring: A ring of switches, thereby providing redundant forwarding paths.  
• Back-to-Back: Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports.  
The number of switches in the stack.  
• Stack Member Count  
• Last Topology Change  
• Master Switch  
The time of the last topology change in the stack.  
The MAC address of the current stack master switch.  
The time of the last master change in the stack.  
• Last Master Change  
„
Stack List  
For each switch in the stack, the following information is shown: The MAC address, Switch ID, product name and version,  
and master election state. The master election state is normally "No". Only when a forced master election is enforced by the  
user, the master election state takes the value "Yes". For details about the master election algorithm, see Stack Configuration.  
The Stack List screen in Figure 4-16-8 appears.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-16-8 Stack Information page screenshot - Stack List  
The page includes the following fields:  
Object  
Description  
Deletes this switch from the stack configuration.  
• Delete  
The MAC address of the switch.  
• Stack Member  
The Switch ID (1-16) assigned to a switch. For more information, see description  
of Switch IDs  
• Switch ID  
Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master. An unmanaged switch, for  
example, will not be Master Capable.  
• Master Capable  
The priority that the switch has in the master election process.  
The smaller the priority, the more likely the switch will become master during the  
master election process.  
• Master Priority  
The product name of the switch.  
• Switch Type  
By checking this option, the "Save" operation will also start the master election  
process.  
• Start Master Election  
This is done by clicking "Start Master Election", followed by "Save". This causes  
the first two criteria to be ignored, thereby basing master election only on master  
priority and MAC address. When master election is enforced, the first two criteria  
are ignored for a period of 10-15 seconds.  
„
Master Forwarding Table  
As the heading suggests, the information in the table is as seen from the master view.  
For each switch in the stack, the following information is shown:  
• The MAC address, switch ID, distance information, and the primary forwarding path to the switch.  
• For ring topology, a backup path is also provided.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-16-9 Stack Information page screenshot - Master Forwarding Table  
4.16.4 Stack Port State Ovewview  
This page provides an overview of the current switch port states. Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics  
page.The port states are illustrated as follows:  
Port Link status  
Stack Port Link status  
SWITCH ID  
MASTER LED  
Figure 4-16-10 Port State Overview page screenshot  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
4.16.5 Stack Example  
Stacking function is convenient for administrator to manage multiple switches by single IP. Basically, you got to have min. 2 units.  
The SGSW Switch supports auto stack configuration. Once the stack cable is connect to the stack port of each SGSW switch  
and power on them, the stack is builded automatically and the Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch. It is also easy  
to add or delete stackable switch to the stack without service interruption. The key point of the Stack management are:  
„
„
Identify the MASTER SWITCH  
Assign / re-assing Switch ID for each management purpose  
Step 1: linking the switches by CB-STX50 stack cable.  
Step 2: Check the Master LED of each SGSW switch to find out the Master Switch that is elected automatically by the stack  
operation.  
Step 3: Use the Web browser such as IE 6.0 to login the Master Switch, the default IP address is 192.168.0.100. Or you can use  
the PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to find out the IP address of the stack group.  
Figure 4-16-11 Use PLANET Smart Discovery Utility to display the IP address of stack master  
Step 4: Choose “Stack \ Stack Configuration” from menu tree. You can see the Stack had established automaticatlly. As the  
below screen appears:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
The Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switches  
All switches with same Priority value “3”.  
The one can’t be delete is the Stack master.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Figure 4-16-12 Stack Configuration  
Step 5: We wish to make the SGSW switch with MAC “00-30-4f-24-04-76” / Switch ID=2 to become the Stack Master and swap  
the Switch ID to 1.  
„
Select the switch with ID=1 and assign a new ID for this unit, for example: ID=4  
Figure 4-16-13 Assing new ID for current master  
„
Select the target switch and set up with lower priority “1”, also re-assing the Switch ID=1 for it. After click Save,  
click “Start Master Election” and save again.  
Figure 4-16-14 Assing lower priority value fo the target switch  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
„
Reflash the web browser, the switch with MAC address “00-30-4f-24-04-76” become the stack master now.  
Figure 4-16-14 The result after master election  
Step 6: After the Stack Master and Members have been configured, any switch in the stack can be managed from the web  
agent by choosing the desired Member ID from the Switch drop down menu.  
Figure 4-16-15 To manage the member switch  
Slave switch IP will be covered by Master one, and disappear temporarily. The slave IP  
address can be the same as Master IP address. Thus, if master switch is malfunction, you  
can still access the other switch by same IP address.  
If you have difficulty on selecting another switch, you may be connecting to the slave  
switch’s web, please close the browser window, use the “arp –d * ” DOS command to clear  
the ARP table and then reopen the web.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
5. COMMAND LINE INTERFACE  
5.1 Accessing the CLI  
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet  
connection, the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's  
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system.  
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Logon to the Console  
Once the terminal has connected to the device, power on the WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch, the terminal will display that it is  
running testing procedures.  
Then, the following message asks the login password. The factory default password as following and the login screen in Figure  
5-1 appears.  
Password: admin  
Figure 5-1 WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch Console Login screen  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
1.  
2.  
For security reason, please change and memorize the new password after this first setup.  
Only accept command in lowercase letter under console interface.  
Configure IP address  
The WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following.  
IP Address : 192.168.0.100  
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0  
To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch, please use the procedures as follow:  
„
1.  
2.  
Show the current IP address  
On ”Switch/> ” prompt, enter “show ip”.  
The screen displays the current IP address, Subnet Mask and Gateway. As show in Figure 5-2.  
Figure 5-2 Show IP information screen  
Configure IP address  
„
3.  
On “Switch/> ” prompt, enter the following command and press <Enter>. As show in Figure 5-3.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Switch/> ip setup 192.168.1.100 255.255.255.0 192.168.1.1  
The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch.  
IP: 192.168.1.100  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0  
Gateway: 192.168.1.1  
Figure 5-3 Set IP address screen  
4.  
Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed.  
If the IP is successfully configured, the Managed Switch will apply the new IP address setting immediately. You can access the  
Web interface of WGSW / SGSW Managed Switch through the new IP address.  
If you do not familiar with console command or the related parameter, enter “help” anytime in  
console to get the help description.  
You can change these settings, if desired, after you log on. This management method is often preferred because you can  
remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots. Also, certain error messages are sent to the serial port,  
regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated. A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any  
terminal-emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port. A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator  
such as TIP  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
5.2 Telnet login  
The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management. The switch asks for user name and password for remote  
login when using telnet, please use “admin” for password.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6. Command Line Mode  
The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command. A sample of the CLI command  
modes are described below. Each of the command modes supports specific software commands.  
Command Groups:  
System  
IP  
System settings and reset options  
IP configuration and Ping  
Port management  
Port  
Aggr  
Link Aggregation  
LACP  
RSTP  
Dot1x  
IGMP  
LLDP  
MAC  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
IEEE 802.1X port authentication  
Internet Group Management Protocol snooping  
Link Layer Discovery Protocol  
MAC address table  
VLAN  
PVLAN  
QoS  
Virtual LAN  
Private VLAN  
Quality of Service  
ACL  
Access Control List  
Mirror  
SNMP  
Stack  
Firmware  
Port mirroring  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
Stack management  
Download of firmware via TFTP  
6.1 System Command  
System Configuration  
Description:  
Show system configuration.  
Syntax:  
System Configuration [all] [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
all  
: Show all switch configuration, default: Show system configuration  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
To display system information:  
Switch/>system configuration  
System Name  
: SGSW-24040  
System Password: admin  
CLI Prompt  
: Switch  
Timezone Offset: 0  
MAC Address  
: 00-30-4f-24-04-03  
: 1970-01-01 03:13:21 +0000  
System Time  
System Uptime : 03:13:21  
SID Software Version  
--- ----------------  
3
Beta_080813  
System Reboot  
Description:  
Reboot the system.  
Syntax:  
System Reboot  
Example:  
To reboot device without changing any of the settings:  
Switch/>system reboot  
System Restore Default  
Description:  
Restore factory default configuration.  
Syntax:  
System Restore Default [keep_ip]  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
keep_ip: Keep IP configuration, default: Restore full configuration  
Example:  
To restore default value but not reset IP address:  
Switch/>system restore default keep_ip  
System Name  
Description:  
Set or show the system name.  
Syntax:  
System Name [<name>]  
Parameters:  
<name>: System name or 'clear' to clear  
System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), minus sign (-). No blank or space characters  
are permitted as part of a name. The first character must be an alpha character, and the first or last character must not be  
a minus sign.  
Default Setting:  
SGSW-24040  
Example:  
To set device title:  
Switch/>System name SGSW-24040-LAB  
System Prompt  
Description:  
Set the CLI prompt string.  
Syntax:  
System Prompt <prompt>  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<prompt>: CLI prompt string  
Default Setting:  
SWITCH  
Example:  
To change CLI title:  
Switch/>system prompt SGSW-24040  
SGSW-24040/>  
System Password  
Description:  
Set or show the system password.  
Syntax:  
System Password [<password>]  
Parameters:  
<password>: System password or 'clear' to clear  
Default Setting:  
admin  
Example:  
To set password:  
Switch/>system password admin  
System SNTP  
Description:  
Set or show the SNTP Time server address.  
Syntax:  
System SNTP [<ip_addr>]  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<ip_addr>: IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address  
Default Setting:  
0.0.0.0  
Example:  
Set SNTP server:  
SWITCH/>system sntp 220.130.158.52  
System Timezone  
Description:  
Set or show the system timezone offset.  
Syntax:  
System Timezone [<offset>]  
Parameters:  
<offset>: Time zone offset in minutes (-720 to 720) relative to UTC  
Default Setting:  
0
Example:  
To set timezone:  
Switch/>system timezone 0  
System Firmware Load  
Description:  
Load new firmware from TFTP server.  
Syntax:  
System Firmware Load <ip_server> <file_name>  
Parameters:  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<ip_server>: TFTP server IP address (a.b.c.d)  
<file_name>: Firmware file name  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IP Configuration  
Description:  
Show IP configuration.  
Syntax:  
IP Configuration  
Example:  
Show IP configuration:  
Switch/>ip configuration  
DHCP Client: Disabled  
IP Address : 192.168.100.105  
IP Mask  
IP Router : 192.168.100.1  
VLAN ID : 1  
SNTP Server: 0.0.0.0  
: 255.255.255.0  
IP DHCP  
Description:  
Set or show the DHCP client mode.  
Syntax:  
IP DHCP [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
enable : Enable or renew DHCP client  
disable: Disable DHCP client  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Disable DHCP sever:  
SWITCH/>ip dhcp disable  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IP Setup  
Description:  
Set or show the IP setup.  
Syntax:  
IP Setup [<ip_addr>] [<ip_mask>] [<ip_router>] [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<ip_addr> : IP address (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP address  
<ip_mask> : IP subnet mask (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP mask  
<ip_router>: IP router (a.b.c.d), default: Show IP router  
<vid>  
: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show VLAN ID  
Default Setting:  
IP Address : 192.168.0.100  
IP Mask : 255.255.255.0  
IP Router : 192.168.0.1  
VLAN ID : 1  
Example:  
Set IP address:  
SWITCH/>ip setup 192.168.0.100 255.255.255.0  
IP Ping  
Description:  
Ping IP address (ICMP echo).  
Syntax:  
IP Ping <ip_addr> [<ping_length>]  
Parameters:  
<ip_addr>  
: IP host address (a.b.c.d)  
<ping_length>: Ping data length (8-1400), excluding MAC, IP and ICMP headers  
Example:  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
SWITCH/>ip ping 192.168.0.51  
PING server 192.168.0.51  
60 bytes from 192.168.0.51: icmp_seq=0, time=0ms  
60 bytes from 192.168.0.51: icmp_seq=1, time=0ms  
60 bytes from 192.168.0.51: icmp_seq=2, time=10ms  
60 bytes from 192.168.0.51: icmp_seq=3, time=0ms  
60 bytes from 192.168.0.51: icmp_seq=4, time=0ms  
Sent 5 packets, received 5 OK, 0 bad  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.2 Port Management Command  
Port Configuration  
Description:  
Show port configuration.  
Syntax:  
Port Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Display port1~4 status  
SWITCH/>port configuration 1-4  
Port State  
Mode  
------  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Auto  
Flow Control MaxFrame Power  
Excessive Link  
------ --------  
----------------- ---------------  
--------  
------------  
Discard  
Discard  
Discard  
Discard  
----  
1
2
3
4
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
9600  
9600  
9600  
9600  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Down  
Down  
Down  
100fdx  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Port State  
Description:  
Set or show the port administrative state.  
Syntax:  
Port State [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable port  
: Disable port  
(default: Show administrative mode)  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Default Setting:  
Enable  
Example:  
Disable port1  
SWITCH/>port state 1 disable  
Port Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the port speed and duplex mode.  
Syntax:  
Port Mode [<port_list>] [10hdx|10fdx|100hdx|100fdx|1000fdx|auto]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
10hdx  
10fdx  
: 10 Mbps, half duplex  
: 10 Mbps, full duplex  
100hdx  
100fdx  
1000fdx  
auto  
: 100 Mbps, half duplex  
: 100 Mbps, full duplex  
: 1 Gbps, full duplex  
: Auto negotiation of speed and duplex  
(default: Show configured and current mode)  
Default Setting:  
Auto  
Example:  
Set 10Mbps (half duplex) speed for port1  
SWITCH/>port mode 1 10hdx  
Port Flow Control  
Description:  
Set or show the port flow control mode.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Syntax:  
Port Flow Control [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable flow control  
: Disable flow control  
(default: Show flow control mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable flow control function for port1  
SWITCH/>port flow control 1 enable  
Port Maximum Frame  
Description:  
Set or show the port maximum frame size.  
Syntax:  
Port MaxFrame [<port_list>] [<max_frame>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<max_frame>: Port maximum frame size (1518-9600), default: Show maximum frame size  
Default Setting:  
9600  
Example:  
Set 2048 frame size for port1  
SWITCH/>port maxframe 1 2048  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Port Power  
Description:  
Set or show the port PHY power mode.  
Syntax:  
Port Power [<port_list>] [enable|disable|actiphy|dynamic]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable all power control  
disable: Disable all power control  
actiphy: Enable ActiPHY power control  
dynamic: Enable Dynamic power control  
Default Setting:  
Enable  
Example:  
Disable port power function for port1-4  
SWITCH/>port power 1-4 disable  
Port Excessive  
Description:  
Set or show the port excessive collision mode.  
Syntax:  
Port Excessive [<port_list>] [discard|restart]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
discard  
restart  
: Discard frame after 16 collisions  
: Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions  
(default: Show mode)  
Default Setting:  
Discard  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Example:  
SWITCH/>port excessive 1 restart  
Port Statistics  
Description:  
Show port statistics.  
Syntax:  
Port Statistics [<port_list>] [<command>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>  
<command> : The command parameter takes the following values:  
: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
clear  
: Clear port statistics  
packets  
bytes  
: Show packet statistics  
: Show byte statistics  
errors  
discards  
filtered  
low  
: Show error statistics  
: Show discard statistics  
: Show filtered statistics  
: Show low priority statistics  
: Show normal priority statistics  
: Show medium priority statistics  
: Show high priority statistics  
normal  
medium  
high  
(default: Show all port statistics)  
Port VeriPHY  
Description:  
Run cable diagnostics.  
Syntax:  
Port VeriPHY [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Port Numbers  
Description:  
Show port numbering.  
Syntax:  
Port Numbers  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Mirror Configuration  
Description:  
Show mirror configuration.  
Syntax:  
Mirror Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Mirror Port  
Description:  
Set or show the mirror port.  
Syntax:  
Mirror Port [<port>|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port>|disable: Mirror port or 'disable', default: Show port  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Mirror SID  
Description:  
Set or show the mirror switch ID.  
Syntax:  
Mirror SID [<sid>]  
Parameters:  
<sid>: Switch ID (1-16)  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
Set mirror SID 2 for switch  
SWITCH/>mirror sid 2  
Mirror Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the mirror mode.  
Syntax:  
Mirror Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable Rx and Tx mirroring  
disable: Disable Mirroring  
rx  
tx  
: Enable Rx mirroring  
: Enable Tx mirroring  
(default: Show mirror mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable mirror mode for port20  
SWITCH/>mirror mode 20 enable  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.3 Link Aggregation Command  
Aggregation Configuration  
Description:  
Show link aggregation configuration.  
Syntax:  
Aggr Configuration  
Example:  
SWITCH/>aggr configuration  
Aggregation Mode:  
SMAC : Enabled  
DMAC : Disabled  
IP  
: Enabled  
: Enabled  
Port  
Aggregation Add  
Description:  
Add or modify link aggregation.  
Syntax:  
Aggr Add <port_list> [<aggr_id>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list  
<aggr_id> : Aggregation ID, global: 1-2, local: 3-14  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Add port 1~4 in Group1  
SWITCH/>aggr add 1-4 1  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Aggregation Delete  
Description:  
Delete link aggregation.  
Syntax:  
Aggr Delete <aggr_id>  
Parameters:  
<aggr_id>: Aggregation ID, global: 1-2, local: 3-14  
Example:  
Delete Group2  
SWITCH/>aggr delete 2  
Aggregation Lookup  
Description:  
Lookup link aggregation.  
Syntax:  
Aggr Lookup [<aggr_id>]  
Parameters:  
<aggr_id>: Aggregation ID, global: 1-2, local: 3-14  
Example:  
Show aggregation status  
SWITCH/>aggr lookup 1  
Aggr ID Name  
----------- -------  
Type  
-------  
Ports  
-------  
1-4  
1
GLAG1 Static  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Aggregation Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode.  
Syntax:  
Aggr Mode [smac|dmac|ip|port] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
smac  
: Source MAC address  
dmac  
: Destination MAC address  
ip  
: Source and destination IP address  
: Source and destination UDP/TCP port  
: Enable field in traffic distribution  
: Disable field in traffic distribution  
port  
enable  
disable  
Default Setting:  
SMAC : Enabled  
DMAC : Disabled  
IP  
: Enabled  
: Enabled  
Port  
Example:  
Disable SMAC mode  
SWITCH/>Aggr mode smac disable  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
LACP Configuration  
Description:  
Show LACP configuration.  
Syntax:  
LACP Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show LACP configuration  
SWITCH/>lacp configuration  
Port Mode  
Key Role  
---- -------- ---- ------  
1
Disabled Auto Active  
2
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
Disabled Auto Active  
LACP Mode  
Description:  
Set or show LACP mode.  
Syntax:  
LACP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable LACP protocol  
disable: Disable LACP protocol  
(default: Show LACP mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable LACP for port1~4  
SWITCH/>lacp mode 1-4 enable  
LACP Key  
Description:  
Set or show the LACP key.  
Syntax:  
LACP Key [<port_list>] [<key>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<key> : LACP key (1-65535) or 'auto'  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Default Setting:  
Auto  
Example:  
Set key1 for port1~4  
SWITCH/>lacp key 1-4 1  
LACP Role  
Description:  
Set or show the LACP role.  
Syntax:  
LACP Role [<port_list>] [active|passive]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
active : Initiate LACP negotiation  
passive: Listen for LACP packets  
(default: Show LACP role)  
Default Setting:  
Active  
Example:  
Set passive for port1~4  
SWITCH/>lacp role 1-4 passive  
LACP Status  
Description:  
Show LACP Status.  
Syntax:  
LACP Status [<port_list>]  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show LACP status of port1~4  
SWITCH/>lacp status 1-4  
Port Mode  
Key  
-----  
1
Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port  
------ ------------  
-------  
------------------------  
------------  
1
2
3
4
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
1
1
LACP Statistics  
Description:  
Show LACP Statistics.  
Syntax:  
LACP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
clear  
: Clear LACP statistics  
Example:  
Show LACP statistics of port1~4  
SWITCH/>lacp statistics 1-4  
Port Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal  
------ ---------------  
---------------  
---------------  
----------  
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.4 VLAN Configuration Command  
VLAN Configuration  
Description:  
Show VLAN configuration.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show VLAN status of port1  
SWITCH/>vlan configuration 1  
Mode : IEEE 802.1Q  
Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType  
LinkType Q-in-Q Mode Eth type  
------------ ------------------ --------  
UnTag Disable N/A  
------------- ----------  
Disabled  
---------------  
All  
1
1
VID Ports  
----  
1
-----  
1-26  
VLAN Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the VLAN Mode.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Mode [portbased|dot1q]  
Parameters:  
portbased  
dot1q  
: Port-Based VLAN Mode  
: 802.1Q VLAN Mode  
Default Setting:  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Dot1q  
Example:  
Set VLAN mode in port base  
SWITCH/>vlan mode portbased  
VLAV PVID  
Description:  
Set or show the port VLAN ID.  
Syntax:  
VLAN PVID [<port_list>] [<vid>|none]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<vid>|none : Port VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'none', default: Show port VLAN ID  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
Set PVID2 for port20  
SWITCH/>vlan pvid 20 2  
VLAN Frame Type  
Description:  
Set or show the port VLAN frame type.  
Syntax:  
VLAN FrameType [<port_list>] [all|tagged]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
all  
: Allow tagged and untagged frames  
: Allow tagged frames only  
tagged  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
(default: Show accepted frame types)  
Default Setting:  
All  
Example:  
Set port20 that allow tagged frames only  
SWITCH/>vlan frametype 20 tagged  
VLAN Ingress Filter  
Description:  
Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter.  
Syntax:  
VLAN IngressFilter [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable VLAN ingress filtering  
: Disable VLAN ingress filtering  
(default: Show VLAN ingress filtering)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port20  
SWITCH/>vlan ingressfilter 20 enable  
VLAN Link Type  
Description:  
Set or show the port VLAN link type.  
Syntax:  
VLAN LinkType [<port_list>] [untagged|tagged]  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
untagged : VLAN Link Type Tagged  
tagged  
: VLAN Link Type Untagged  
Default Setting:  
Un-tagged  
Example:  
Enable tagged frame for port2  
SWITCH/>vlan linktype 2 tagged  
VLAN Q-in-Q Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the port Q-in-Q mode.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Qinqmode [<port_list>] [disable|man|customer]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
disable  
man  
: Disable Q-in-Q VLAN Mode  
: Q-in-Q MAN Port Mode  
customer  
: Q-in-Q Customer Port Mode  
VLAN Ethernet Type  
Description:  
Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q-in-Q VLAN mode.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Ethtype [<port_list>] [man|dot1q]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
man : Set out layer VLAN tag ether type : MAN  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
dot1q  
: Set out layer VLAN tag ether type : 802.1Q  
Default Setting:  
N/A  
Example:  
SWITCH/>vlan ethtype 10 man  
VLAN Add  
Description:  
Add or modify VLAN entry.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Add <vid> [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<vid>  
: VLAN ID (1-4095)  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
Add port17 to port24 in VLAN10  
SWITCH/>vlan add 10 17-24  
VLAN Delete  
Description:  
Delete VLAN entry.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Delete <vid>  
Parameters:  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)  
Example:  
Delete port17 to port24 in VLAN10  
SWITCH/>vlan delete 10 17-24  
VLAN Lookup  
Description:  
Lookup VLAN entry.  
Syntax:  
VLAN Lookup [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs  
Example:  
Show VLAN status  
SWITCH/>vlan lookup  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
PVLAN Configuration  
Description:  
Show Private VLAN configuration.  
Syntax:  
PVLAN Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
PVLAN Isolate  
Description:  
Set or show the port isolation mode.  
Syntax:  
PVLAN Isolate [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable port isolation  
: Disable port isolation  
(default: Show port isolation port list)  
Default Setting:  
Promiscous  
Example:  
Enable isolate for port10  
SWITCH/>pvlan isolate 10 enable  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.5 Spanning Tree Protocol Command  
RSTP Configuration  
Description:  
Show RSTP configuration.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Show RSTP status of port1  
SWITCH/>rstp configuration 1  
System Priority : 32768  
Max Age  
: 20  
Forward Delay : 15  
Protocol Version: Normal  
Port Mode  
Path Cost  
Priority  
---------- -----------  
128 Enabled  
Edge  
Point2point  
---------------  
Auto  
----  
1
-------------  
Disabled  
--------------  
Auto  
RSTP SysPrio  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP system priority.  
Syntax:  
RSTP SysPrio [<sys_prio>]  
Parameters:  
<sys_prio>: RSTP system priority (0/4096/8192/.../57344/61440)  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Default Setting:  
32768  
Example:  
Set RSTP system priority value in 4096  
SWITCH/>rstp sysprio 4096  
RSTP Age  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP maximum age.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Age [<max_age>]  
Parameters:  
<max_age>: RSTP maximum age time (6-200)  
Default Setting:  
20  
Example:  
Set RSTP maximum age time in 200  
SWITCH/>rstp age 200  
RSTP Delay  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP forward delay.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Delay [<delay>]  
Parameters:  
<delay>: RSTP forward delay (4-30)  
Default Setting:  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
15  
Example:  
Set RSTP forward delay value in 25  
SWITCH/>rstp delay 25  
RSTP Version  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP protocol version.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Version [compatible|normal]  
Parameters:  
compatible: Compatible with STP  
normal  
: RSTP  
Default Setting:  
Normal  
Example:  
Change RSTP version in compatible  
SWITCH/>rstp version compatible  
RSTP Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP mode.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.  
enable : Enable RSTP protocol  
disable: Disable RSTP protocol  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable rstp mode for port1  
SWITCH/>rstp mode 1 enable  
RSTP Cost  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP path cost.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Cost [<port_list>] [<path_cost>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.  
<path_cost>: RSTP path cost (1-2000000000) or 'auto'  
Default Setting:  
Auto  
Example:  
Set RSTP cost value in 1 for port1  
SWITCH/>rstp cost 1 1  
RSTP Priority  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP priority.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Priority [<port_list>] [<priority>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all'. Port zero means aggregations.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<priority> : RSTP priority (0/16/32/48/.../224/240)  
Default Setting:  
128  
Example:  
Set RSTP priority value in 16 for port1  
SWITCH/>rstp priority 1 16  
RSTP Edge  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP edge parameter.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Edge [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable RSTP edge  
disable: Disable RSTP edge  
Default Setting:  
Enable  
Example:  
Disable RSTP edge parameter for port1  
SWITCH/>rstp edge 1 disable  
RSTP P2P  
Description:  
Set or show the RSTP point2point parameter.  
Syntax:  
RSTP P2P [<port_list>] [enable|disable|auto]  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable RSTP point2point  
disable: Disable RSTP point2point  
auto  
: Automatic RSTP point2point detection  
Default Setting:  
Auto  
Example:  
Enable RSTP P2P mode for port1  
SWITCH/>rstp p2p 1 enable  
RSTP Status  
Description:  
Show RSTP status.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Status [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show RSTP status  
SWITCH/>rstp status  
=================================================================  
VLAN ID  
Bridge ID  
Root ID  
: 3  
: 32771:00-30-4f-24-24-c1  
: 32771:00-30-4f-24-24-c1  
Root Port  
Root Cost  
: -  
: 0  
Topology Flag: Steady  
Port  
------  
1
Port Role  
-------------  
Disabled  
State  
Path Cost Edge  
P2P Neigb  
----------  
Disabled  
-------------  
1
------  
No  
------  
Yes  
-------  
RSTP  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
RSTP Statistics  
Description:  
Show RSTP statistics.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Statistics [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
RSTP mCheck  
Description:  
Set the RSTP mCheck (Migration Check) variable for ports.  
Syntax:  
RSTP Mcheck [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.6 Multicast Configuration Command  
IGMP Configuration  
Description:  
Show IGMP snooping configuration.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Default Setting:  
IGMP Mode: Disabled  
Flooding : Disabled  
Example:  
Enable IGMP mode  
SWITCH/>igmp mode enable  
IGMP Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping mode.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Mode [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
enable : Enable IGMP snooping  
disable: Disable IGMP snooping  
(default: Show IGMP snooping mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled  
Example:  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Enable IGMP mode  
SWITCH/>igmp mode enable  
IGMP State  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN.  
Syntax:  
IGMP State [<vid>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs  
enable : Enable IGMP snooping  
disable: Disable IGMP snooping  
(default: Show IGMP snooping mode)  
Default Setting:  
VID State  
----  
1
---------  
Enabled  
Example:  
Enable IGMP mode  
SWITCH/>igmp mode enable  
IGMP State  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN.  
Syntax:  
IGMP State [<vid>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs  
enable : Enable IGMP snooping  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
disable: Disable IGMP snooping  
(default: Show IGMP snooping mode)  
Default Setting:  
Enable  
Example:  
Disable VID 1  
SWITCH/>igmp state 1 disable  
IGMP Querier  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Querier [<vid>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: Show all VLANs  
enable : Enable IGMP querier  
disable : Disable IGMP querier  
(default: Show IGMP querier mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
SWITCH/>igmp querier 1 enable  
IGMP Fast Leave  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode.  
Syntax:  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IGMP Fastleave [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable IGMP fast leave  
disable : Disable IGMP fast leave  
(default: Show IGMP fast leave mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
SWITCH/>igmp fastleave 1 enable  
IGMP Router  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping router port mode.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Router [<port_list>] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable IGMP router port  
disable : Disable IGMP router port  
(default: Show IGMP router port mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable IGMP snooping function for port1~4  
SWITCH/>igmp router 1-4 enable  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
IGMP Flooding  
Description:  
Set or show the IGMP snooping unregistered flood operation.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Flooding [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
enable : Enable IGMP flooding  
disable: Disable IGMP flooding  
(default: Show IGMP flood mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable IGMP flooding function  
SWITCH/>igmp flooding enable  
IGMP Groups  
Description:  
Show IGMP groups.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Groups [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)  
IGMP Status  
Description:  
Show IGMP status.  
Syntax:  
IGMP Status [<vid>]  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<vid>: VLAN ID (1-4095)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable IGMP flooding function  
SWITCH/>igmp status 1  
Switch 1:  
---------  
Querier  
Rx  
Tx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
Rx  
VID Status  
Queries  
----------  
0
Queries  
----------  
0
V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leave  
----  
1
--------  
IDLE  
------------  
0
-------------  
0
-------------- -----------  
0
0
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.7 Quality of Service Command  
QoS Configuration  
Description:  
Show QoS Configuration.  
Syntax:  
QoS Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
QoS Classes  
Description:  
Set or show the number of traffic classes.  
Syntax:  
QoS Classes [<class>]  
Parameters:  
<class>: Number of traffic classes (1,2 or 4)  
Default Setting:  
4
Example:  
Set QoS classes 2  
SWITCH/>qos classes 2  
QoS Default  
Description:  
Set or show the default port priority.  
Syntax:  
QoS Default [<port_list>] [<class>]  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<class>  
: Traffic class low/normal/medium/high or 1/2/3/4  
Default Setting:  
Low  
Example:  
Set high priority for port5  
SWITCH/>qos default 5 high  
QoS Tag Priority  
Description:  
Set or show the port VLAN tag priority.  
Syntax:  
QoS Tagprio [<port_list>] [<tag_prio>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<tag_prio> : VLAN tag priority (0-7)  
Default Setting:  
0
Example:  
Set priority7 for VLAN3  
SWITCH/>qos tagprio 3 7  
QoS QCL Port  
Description:  
Set or show the port QCL ID.  
Syntax:  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
QoS QCL Port [<port_list>] [<qcl_id>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<qcl_id> : QCL ID  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
Set QCL ID5 for port10  
SWITCH/>qos qcl port 10 5  
QoS QCL Add  
Description:  
Add or modify QoS Control Entry (QCE).  
If the QCE ID parameter <qce_id> is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists, the QCE will be modified.  
Otherwise, a new QCE will be added. If the QCE ID is not specified, the next available QCE ID will be used.  
If the next QCE ID parameter <qce_id_next> is specified, the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list. If the next  
QCE ID is not specified, the QCE will be placed last in the list.  
Syntax:  
QoS QCL Add [<qcl_id>] [<qce_id>] [<qce_id_next>]  
(etype <etype>) |  
(vid <vid>) |  
(port <udp_tcp_port>) |  
(dscp <dscp>) |  
(tos <tos_list>) |  
(tag_prio <tag_prio_list>)  
<class>  
Parameters:  
<qcl_id>  
<qce_id>  
: QCL ID  
: QCE ID (1-24)  
<qce_id_next> : Next QCE ID (1-24)  
etype : Ethernet Type keyword  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<etype>  
vid  
: Ethernet Type  
: VLAN ID keyword  
: VLAN ID (1-4095)  
: UDP/TCP port keyword  
<vid>  
port  
<udp_tcp_port> : Source or destination UDP/TCP port (0-65535)  
dscp  
: IP DSCP keyword  
: IP DSCP (0-63)  
<dscp>  
tos  
: IP ToS keyword  
<tos_list>  
tag_prio  
: IP ToS list (0-7)  
: VLAN tag priority keyword  
<tag_prio_list>: VLAN tag priority list (0-7)  
<class>  
: Traffic class low/normal/medium/high or 1/2/3/4  
QoS QCL Delete  
Description:  
Delete QCE.  
Syntax:  
QoS QCL Delete <qcl_id> <qce_id>  
Parameters:  
<qcl_id>: QCL ID  
<qce_id>: QCE ID (1-24)  
QoS QCL Lookup  
Description:  
Lookup QCE.  
Syntax:  
QoS QCL Lookup [<qcl_id>] [<qce_id>]  
Parameters:  
<qcl_id>: QCL ID  
<qce_id>: QCE ID (1-24)  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
QoS Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the port egress scheduler mode.  
Syntax:  
QoS Mode [<port_list>] [strict|weighted]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
strict : Strict mode  
weighted: Weighted mode  
(default: Show QoS mode)  
Default Setting:  
Strict  
Example:  
Set weighted mode for port15  
SWITCH/>qos mode 15 weighted  
QoS Weight  
Description:  
Set or show the port egress scheduler weight.  
Syntax:  
QoS Weight [<port_list>] [<class>] [<weight>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<class>  
: Traffic class low/normal/medium/high or 1/2/3/4  
: Traffic class weight 1/2/4/8  
<weight>  
QoS Rate Limiter  
Description:  
Set or show the port rate limiter.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Syntax:  
QoS Rate Limiter [<port_list>] [enable|disable] [<bit_rate>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable rate limiter  
: Disable rate limiter  
(default: Show rate limiter mode)  
<bit_rate> : Rate in 1000 bits per second (500-1000000 kbps)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled, 500kbps  
Example:  
Set 1000kbps rate limiter for port17~24  
SWITCH/>qos rate limiter 17-24 enable 1000  
QoS Shaper  
Description:  
Set or show the port shaper.  
Syntax:  
QoS Shaper [<port_list>] [enable|disable] [<bit_rate>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable  
disable  
: Enable shaper  
: Disable shaper  
(default: Show shaper mode)  
<bit_rate> : Rate in 1000 bits per second (500-1000000 kbps)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled, 500kbps  
Example:  
Set 1000kbps shaper for port 9~16  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
SWITCH/>qos shaper 9-16 enable 1000  
QoS Unicast  
Description:  
Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter.  
Syntax:  
QoS Storm Unicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]  
Parameters:  
enable  
: Enable unicast storm control  
: Disable unicast storm control  
disable  
<packet_rate>: Rate in pps (1, 2, 4, ..., 512, 1k, 2k, 4k, ..., 1024k)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled, 1pps  
Example:  
Enable unicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps  
SWITCH/>qos storm unicast enable 1k  
QoS Multicast  
Description:  
Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter.  
Syntax:  
QoS Storm Multicast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]  
Parameters:  
enable  
: Enable multicast storm control  
: Disable multicast storm control  
disable  
<packet_rate>: Rate in pps (1, 2, 4, ..., 512, 1k, 2k, 4k, ..., 1024k)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled, 1pps  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Example:  
Enable multicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps  
SWITCH/>qos storm multicast enable 1k  
QoS Broadcast  
Description:  
Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter.  
Syntax:  
QoS Storm Broadcast [enable|disable] [<packet_rate>]  
Parameters:  
enable  
: Enable broadcast storm control  
: Disable broadcast storm control  
disable  
<packet_rate>: Rate in pps (1, 2, 4, ..., 512, 1k, 2k, 4k, ..., 1024k)  
Default Setting:  
Disabled, 1pps  
Example:  
Enable broadcast storm rate limiter in 1kpps  
SWITCH/>qos storm broadcast enable 1k  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.8 802.1x Port Access Control Command  
Dot1x Configuration  
Description:  
Show 802.1X configuration.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show IEEE802.1x status of port1  
SWITCH/>dot1x configuration 1  
Mode  
: Disabled  
: 0.0.0.0  
:
RADIUS Server  
RADIUS Secret  
Reauthentication: Disabled  
Period  
: 3600  
: 30  
Timeout  
Age Period  
Hold Time  
: 300  
: 10  
Port  
------  
1
Admin State  
------------------  
Authorized  
Port State  
------------------------- -----------------  
802.1X Disabled  
Last Source  
Last ID  
-------  
-
-
Dotx1 Mode  
Description:  
Set or show the 802.1X mode for the switch.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Mode [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
enable : Enable 802.1X  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
disable: Disable 802.1X  
(default: Show 802.1X mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable IEEE802.1x founction for port1  
SWITCH/>dot1x mode enable  
Dot1x Status  
Description:  
Set or show the 802.1X port state.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x State [<port_list>] [macbased|auto|authorized|unauthorized]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
macbased  
auto  
: Switch performs 802.1X authentication on behalf of the client  
: Port access requires 802.1X authentication  
authorized : Port access is allowed  
unauthorized: Port access is not allowed  
(default: Show 802.1X state)  
Default Setting:  
Authorized  
Example:  
Change IEEE802.1x mode in auto.  
SWITCH/>dot1x state 1 auto  
Dot1x Server  
Description:  
Set or show the RADIUS server IP address.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Server [<ip_addr>]  
Parameters:  
ip_addr: RADIUS server IP address (a.b.c.d) (default: Show IP address)  
Default Setting:  
0.0.0.0  
Example:  
Set RADIUS server IP address for switch. RADIUS server IP address is 192.168.0.254.  
SWITCH/>dot1x server 192.168.0.254  
Dot1x Secret  
Description:  
Set or show the secret shared with the RADIUS server.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Secret [<shared_secret>]  
Parameters:  
<shared_secret>: Secret shared with external RADIUS server. To set an empty secret, use two quotes (""). To use  
spaces in secret, enquote the secret. Quotes in the secret are not allowed.  
(default: Show shared secret)  
Default Setting:  
empty  
Example:  
Set authentication key “123abc@” in switch with the RADIUS server.  
SWITCH/>dot1x secret 123abc@  
Dot1x Authenticate  
Description:  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Refresh (restart) 802.1X authentication process.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Authenticate [<port_list>] [now]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
now : Force reauthentication immediately  
Dot1x Re-authentication  
Description:  
Set or show Reauthentication mode.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Reauthentication [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
enable : Enable reauthentication  
disable: Disable reauthentication  
(default: Show reauthentication mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable re-authentication function  
SWITCH/>dot1x reauthentication enable  
Dot1x Period  
Description:  
Set or show the period between reauthentications.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Period [<reauth_period>]  
Parameters:  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<reauth_period>: Period between reauthentications (1-3600 seconds)  
(default: Show reauthentication period)  
Default Setting:  
3600  
Example:  
Set period re-authentication time in 3000 seconds  
SWITCH/>dot1x period 3000  
Dot1x Timeout  
Description:  
Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Timeout [<eapol_timeout>]  
Parameters:  
<eapol_timeout>: Time between EAPOL retransmissions (1-255 seconds)  
(default: Show retransmission timeout)  
Default Setting:  
30  
Example:  
Set re-transmission time in 60 seconds  
SWITCH/>dot1x timeout 60  
Dot1x Statistics  
Description:  
Show 802.1X statistics.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Statistics [<port_list>] [clear|eapol|radius]  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
clear  
: Clear statistics  
eapol  
radius  
: Show EAPOL statistics  
: Show RADIUS statistics  
(default: Show all statistics)  
Dot1x Clients  
Description:  
Set or show the maximum number of allowed clients for MAC-based ports.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Clients [<port_list>] [all|<client_cnt>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>  
all|<client_cnt>: MAC-based authentication: Set maximum number of clients allowed on a port.  
all : Allow all new clients  
: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<client_cnt>: A number >= 1  
(default: Show current maximum)  
Default Setting:  
All  
Dot1x Agetime  
Description:  
Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Agetime [<age_time>]  
Parameters:  
<age_time>: Time between checks for activity on a MAC address that succeeded authentication  
(default: Show age time)  
Default Setting:  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
300  
Example:  
Set age time in 100 seconds  
SWITCH/>dot1x agetime 100  
Dot1x Holdtime  
Description:  
Time in seconds before a MAC-address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance.  
Syntax:  
Dot1x Holdtime [<hold_time>]  
Parameters:  
<hold_time>: Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire  
(default: Show hold time)  
Default Setting:  
10  
Example:  
Set hold time in 100 seconds  
SWITCH/>dot1x holdtime 100  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.9 Access Control List Command  
ACL Configuration  
Description:  
Show ACL Configuration.  
Syntax:  
ACL Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Default Setting:  
300  
Example:  
Set age time in 100 seconds  
SWITCH/>dot1x agetime 100  
ACL Action  
Description:  
Set or show the ACL port default action.  
Syntax:  
ACL Action [<port_list>] [permit|deny] [<rate_limiter>] [<port_copy>] [<logging>] [<shutdown>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list> : Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
permit  
deny  
: Permit forwarding (default)  
: Deny forwarding  
<rate_limiter>: Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'  
<port_copy>  
<logging>  
: Port number for copy of frames or 'disable'  
: System logging of frames: log|log_disable  
: Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable  
<shutdown>  
Default Setting:  
Action: Permit  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Rate Limiter: Disable  
Port Copy: Disable  
Loading: Disable  
Shut down: Disable  
Example:  
????  
SWITCH/>acl action 17-24 deny 1 24 log shut  
ACL Policy  
Description:  
Set or show the ACL port policy.  
Syntax:  
ACL Policy [<port_list>] [<policy>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
<policy>  
: Policy number (1-8)  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
Set policy ID 8 for port 17-24  
SWITCH/>acl policy 17-24 8  
ACL Rate  
Description:  
Set or show the ACL rate limiter.  
Syntax:  
ACL Rate [<rate_limiter_list>] [<packet_rate>]  
Parameters:  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<rate_limiter_list>: Rate limiter list (1-15), default: All rate limiters  
<packet_rate> : Rate in pps (1, 2, 4, ..., 512, 1k, 2k, 4k, ..., 1024k)  
Default Setting:  
1
Example:  
???  
SWITCH/>acl rate 15 1024k  
ACL Add  
Description:  
Add or modify Access Control Entry (ACE).  
If the ACE ID parameter <ace_id> is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists, the ACE will be modified.  
Otherwise, a new ACE will be added. If the ACE ID is not specified, the next available ACE ID will be used.  
If the next ACE ID parameter <ace_id_next> is specified, the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list. If the next  
ACE ID is not specified, the ACE will be placed last in the list.  
If the Switch keyword is used, the rule applies to aSyntax:  
ACL Add [<ace_id>] [<ace_id_next>] [switch | (port <port>) | (policy <policy>)] [<sid>] [<vid>] [<tag_prio>] [<dmac_type>]  
[(etype [<etype>] [<smac>] [<dmac>]) | (arp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<smac>] [<arp_opcode>] [<arp_flags>]) | (ip [<sip>]  
[<dip>] [<protocol>] [<ip_flags>]) | (icmp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<icmp_type>] [<icmp_code>] [<ip_flags>]) | (udp [<sip>] [<dip>]  
[<sport>] [<dport>] [<ip_flags>]) | (tcp [<sip>] [<dip>] [<sport>] [<dport>]Parameters:  
<ace_id>  
: ACE ID (1-1024), default: Next available ID  
<ace_id_next> : Next ACE ID (1-1024), default: Add ACE last  
switch  
: Switch ACE keyword  
port  
: Port ACE keyword  
<port>  
: Port number  
policy  
: Policy ACE keyword  
<policy>  
<sid>  
: Policy number (1-8)  
: Switch ID (1-16) or 'any'  
: VLAN ID (1-4095) or 'any'  
: VLAN tag priority (0-7) or 'any'  
: DMAC type: any|unicast|multicast|broadcast  
: Ethernet Type keyword  
: Ethernet Type or 'any'  
<vid>  
<tag_prio>  
<dmac_type>  
etype  
<etype>  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<smac>  
<dmac>  
arp  
: Source MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) or 'any'  
: Destination MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) or 'any'  
: ARP keyword  
<sip>  
<dip>  
: Source IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'  
: Destination IP address (a.b.c.d/n) or 'any'  
<arp_opcode> : ARP operation code: any|arp|rarp|other  
<arp_flags>  
ip  
: ARP flags: request|smac|tmac|len|ip|ether [0|1|any]  
: IP keyword  
<protocol>  
<ip_flags>  
icmp  
: IP protocol number (0-255) or 'any'  
: IP flags: ttl|options|fragment [0|1|any]  
: ICMP keyword  
<icmp_type>  
<icmp_code>  
udp  
: ICMP type number (0-255) or 'any'  
: ICMP code number (0-255) or 'any'  
: UDP keyword  
<sport>  
<dport>  
tcp  
: Source UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or 'any'  
: Destination UDP/TCP port range (0-65535) or 'any'  
: TCP keyword  
<tcp_flags>  
permit  
: TCP flags: fin|syn|rst|psh|ack|urg [0|1|any]  
: Permit forwarding (default)  
deny  
: Deny forwarding  
<rate_limiter>: Rate limiter number (1-15) or 'disable'  
<port_copy>  
<logging>  
: Port number for copy of frames or 'disable'  
: System logging of frames: log|log_disable  
: Shut down ingress port: shut|shut_disable  
<shutdown>  
ACL Delete  
Description:  
Delete ACE.  
Syntax:  
ACL Delete <ace_id>  
Parameters:  
<ace_id>: ACE ID (1-1024)  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
ACL Lookup  
Description:  
Show ACE, default: All ACEs.  
Syntax:  
ACL Lookup [<ace_id>]  
Parameters:  
<ace_id>: ACE ID (1-1024)  
ACL Lookup  
Description:  
Clear all ACL counters.  
Syntax:  
ACL Clear  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.10 MAC Address Table Command  
MAC Configuration  
Description:  
Show MAC address table configuration.  
Syntax:  
MAC Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Show port1 Mac state  
SWITCH/>mac configuration 1  
MAC Age Time: 300  
Switch 1:  
---------  
Port Learning  
------ ----------  
1
Auto  
Mac Add  
Description:  
Add MAC address table entry.  
Syntax:  
MAC Add <mac_addr> <port_list> [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<mac_addr> : MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all' or 'none'  
<vid>  
: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Example:  
Add Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02 in port1 and vid1  
SWITCH/>mac add 00-30-4f-01-01-02 1 1  
MAC Delete  
Description:  
Delete MAC address entry.  
Syntax:  
MAC Delete <mac_addr> [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<mac_addr>: MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
<vid>  
: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1  
Example:  
Delete Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02 in vid1  
SWITCH/>mac delete 00-30-4f-01-01-02 1  
MAC Lookup  
Description:  
Lookup MAC address entry.  
Syntax:  
MAC Lookup <mac_addr> [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<mac_addr>: MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
<vid>  
: VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1  
Example:  
Lookup state of Mac address 00-30-4F-01-01-02  
SWITCH/>mac lookup 00-30-4f-01-01-02  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
MAC Age Time  
Description:  
Set or show the MAC address age timer.  
Syntax:  
MAC Agetime [<age_time>]  
Parameters:  
<age_time>: MAC address age time (10-1000000), default: Show age time  
Default Setting:  
300  
Example:  
Set agetime value in 30  
SWITCH/>mac agetime 30  
MAC Learning  
Description:  
Set or show the port learn mode.  
Syntax:  
MAC Learning [<port_list>] [auto|disable|secure]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
auto : Automatic learning  
disable: Disable learning  
secure : Secure learning  
(default: Show learn mode)  
Default Setting:  
Auto  
Example:  
Set secure learning mode in port1  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
SWITCH/>mac learning 1 secure  
MAC Dump  
Description:  
Show sorted list of MAC address entries.  
Syntax:  
MAC Dump [<mac_max>] [<mac_addr>] [<vid>]  
Parameters:  
<mac_max> : Maximum number of MAC addresses 1-8192, default: Show all addresses  
<mac_addr>: First MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx), default: MAC address zero  
<vid>  
: First VLAN ID (1-4095), default: 1  
Example:  
Show all of MAC table  
SWITCH/>mac dump  
MAC Statistics  
Description:  
Show MAC address table statistics.  
Syntax:  
MAC Statistics [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
Example:  
Set all of MAC statistics  
SWITCH/>mac statistics  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
MAC Flash  
Description:  
Flush all learned entries.  
Syntax:  
MAC Flush  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.11 LLDP Command  
LLDP Configuration  
Description:  
Show LLDP configuration.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Configuration [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
LLDP Mode  
Description:  
Set or show LLDP mode.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Mode [<port_list>] [enable|disable|rx|tx]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
enable : Enable LLDP reception and transmission  
disable: Disable LLDP  
rx  
tx  
: Enable LLDP reception only  
: Enable LLDP transmission only  
(default: Show LLDP mode)  
Default Setting:  
Disable  
Example:  
Enable port1 LLDP function.  
SWITCH/>lldp mode 1 enable  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
LLDP Optional TLV  
Description:  
Show / Set LLDP Optional TLVs.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Optional_TLV [<port_list>] [port_descr|sys_name|sys_descr|sys_capa|mgmt_addr] [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
port_descr  
: Description of the port  
: System name  
sysm_name  
sys_descr  
sys_capa  
: Description of the system  
: System capabilities  
: Master's IP address  
mgmt_addr  
(default: Show optional TLV's configuration)  
enable  
disable  
: Enables TLV  
: Disable TLV  
(default: Show optional TLV's configuration)  
Default Setting:  
Description of the port: Enable  
System name: Enable  
Description of the system: Enable  
System capabilities:  
Master's IP address:  
Enable  
Enable  
Example:  
Disable description of the port for port1  
SWITCH/>lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable  
LLDP Interval  
Description:  
Set or show LLDP Tx interval.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Interval [<interval>]  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Parameters:  
<interval>: LLDP transmission interval (5-32768)  
Default Setting:  
30  
Example:  
Set transmission interval in 10  
SWITCH/>lldp interval 10  
LLDP Hold  
Description:  
Set or show LLDP Tx hold value.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Hold [<hold>]  
Parameters:  
<hold>: LLDP hold value (2-10)  
Default Setting:  
3
Example:  
Set LLDP hold value in 10  
SWITCH/>lldp hold 10  
LLDP Delay  
Description:  
Set or show LLDP Tx delay.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Delay [<delay>]  
Parameters:  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
<delay>: LLDP transmission delay (1-8192)  
Default Setting:  
2
Example:  
Set LLDP delay value in 1  
SWITCH/>lldp delay 1  
LLDP Reinit  
Description:  
Set or show LLDP reinit delay.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Reinit [<reinit>]  
Parameters:  
<reinit>: LLDP reinit delay (1-10)  
Default Setting:  
2
Example:  
Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3  
SWITCH/>lldp reinit 3  
LLDP Information  
Description:  
Show LLDP neighbor device information.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Info [<port_list>]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
LLDP Statistics  
Description:  
Show LLDP Statistics.  
Syntax:  
LLDP Statistics [<port_list>] [clear]  
Parameters:  
<port_list>: Port list or 'all', default: All ports  
clear : Clear LLDP statistics  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
6.12 Stack Management Command  
Stack List  
Description:  
Show the list of switches in stack.  
Syntax:  
Stack List [detailed|productinfo]  
Parameters:  
detailed: Show detailed information  
Stack List  
Description:  
Set the master election priority.  
Syntax:  
Stack Master Priority <sid>|local <mst_elect_prio>  
Parameters:  
<sid>|local  
: Switch ID (1-16) or local switch  
<mst_elect_prio>: Master election priority: 1-4. 1 => Highest master probability  
Example:  
Set low priority for switch2  
SWITCH/>stack master priority 2 4  
Stack Master Reelect  
Description:  
Force master reelection (ignoring master time).  
Syntax:  
Stack Master Reelect  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Stack Select  
Description:  
Set or show the selected switch ID.  
Syntax:  
Stack Select [<sid>|all]  
Parameters:  
<sid>: Switch ID (1-16), default: Show SID  
Example:  
Select switch2 to management switch2  
SWITCH/>stack select 2  
Stack SID Swap  
Description:  
Swap SID values used to identify two switches.  
Syntax:  
Stack SID Swap <sid> <sid>  
Parameters:  
<sid>: Switch ID (1-16)  
Example:  
Swap switch ID 1 and 2  
SWITCH/>stack sid swap 2 1  
Stack SID Delect  
Description:  
Delete SID assignment and associated configuration.  
Syntax:  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
Stack SID Delete <sid>  
Parameters:  
<sid>: Switch ID (1-16)  
Stack SID Asign  
Description:  
Assign SID and associated configuration to switch.  
SID must be unassigned, switch must be present and switch must not already be assigned to a SID.  
Syntax:  
Stack SID Assign <sid> <mac_addr>  
Parameters:  
<sid>  
<mac_addr>: MAC address (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
: Switch ID (1-16)  
Example:  
Assign SID2 for switch that use MAC address 00-30-4f-24-04-76  
SWITCH/>stack sid assign 2 00-30-4f-24-04-76  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
7. SWITCH OPERATION  
7.1 Address Table  
The Switch is implemented with an address table. This address table composed of many entries. Each entry is used to store the  
address information of some node in network, including MAC address, port no, etc. This in-formation comes from the learning  
process of Ethernet Switch.  
7.2 Learning  
When one packet comes in from any port, the Switch will record the source address, port no. And the other related information  
in address table. This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets.  
7.3 Forwarding & Filtering  
When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching, it will also check the destination address besides the source  
address learning. The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address-table for the destination address. If not found, this packet will  
be forwarded to all the other ports except the port, which this packet comes in. And these ports will transmit this packet to the  
network it connected. If found, and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in, the Ethernet  
Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address  
table. But, if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in, then this packet will be filtered.  
Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability  
7.4 Store-and-Forward  
Store-and-Forward is one type of packet-forwarding techniques. A Store-and-Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming  
frame in an internal buffer, do the complete error checking before transmission. Therefore, no error packets occurrence, it is the  
best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability.  
The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet-header, searches the routing table pro-vided for the  
incoming port and forwards the packet, only if required. The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers  
directly to the network, thereby increasing throughput and availability. How-ever, the switch is most commonly used to segment  
existence hubs, which nearly always improves overall performance. An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any  
Ethernet network environment to signifi-cantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters.  
Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching, the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and  
outgoing packet are stored in a routing table. This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address  
is on the same segment as the source address. This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall  
load on the network.  
The Switch performs "Store and forward" therefore, no error packets occur. More reliably, it reduces the re-transmission rate.  
No packet loss will occur.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
7.5 Auto-Negotiation  
The STP ports on the Switch have built-in "Auto-negotiation". This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth  
when a connection is established with another network device (usually at Power On or Reset). This is done by detect the modes  
and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of, both 10Base-T and 100Base-TX devices can connect  
with the port in either Half- or Full-Duplex mode.  
If attached device is:  
100Base-TX port will set to:  
10Mbps.  
10Mbps, no auto-negotiation  
10Mbps, with auto-negotiation  
100Mbps, no auto-negotiation  
100Mbps, with auto-negotiation  
10/20Mbps (10Base-T/Full-Duplex)  
100Mbps  
100/200Mbps (100Base-TX/Full-Duplex)  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
8. TROUBLE SHOOTING  
This chapter contains information to help you solve problems. If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly, make sure the  
Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual.  
■
■
■
The Link LED is not lit  
Solution:  
Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch  
Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port  
Solution:  
Please check the VLAN settings, trunk settings, or port enabled / disabled status.  
Performance is bad  
Solution:  
Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch. If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half  
duplex, then the performance will be poor. Please also check the in/out rate of the port.  
■
Why the Switch doesn't connect to the network  
Solution:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Check the LNK/ACT LED on the switch  
Try another port on the Switch  
Make sure the cable is installed properly  
Make sure the cable is the right type  
Turn off the power. After a while, turn on power again  
■
100Base-TX port link LED is lit, but the traffic is irregular  
Solution:  
Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex. Some devices use a physical or software switch to change  
duplex modes. Auto-negotiation may not recognize this type of full-duplex setting.  
■
Switch does not power up  
Solution:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
AC power cord not inserted or faulty  
Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly  
Replace the power cord If the cord is inserted correctly, check that the AC power source is working by connecting a  
different device in place of the switch.  
4.  
5.  
If that device works, refer to the next step.  
If that device does not work, check the AC power  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
■
Stacking not functioning  
Solution:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Check that modules are installed correctly  
PLANET CB-STX50 or CB-STX200 cables not installed correctly (LEDs on front panel STX1 or STX2 do not light)  
Check that the cables are inserted correctly  
The stack cable is PLANET proprietary stack cable, the stack cable is cross-overed HDMI-like cable, the normal HDMI  
cable can’t be used for the SGSW series.  
„ While IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password –  
To reset the IP address to the default IP Address “192.168.0.100” or reset the password to default value. Press the hardware  
reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds. After the device is rebooted, you can login the management WEB interface  
within the same subnet of 192.168.0.xx.  
Reset  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
APPENDEX A  
A.1 Switch's RJ-45 Pin Assignments  
1000Mbps, 1000Base T  
Contact  
MDI  
MDI-X  
BI_DB+  
BI_DB-  
BI_DA+  
BI_DD+  
BI_DD-  
BI_DA-  
BI_DC+  
BI_DC-  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BI_DA+  
BI_DA-  
BI_DB+  
BI_DC+  
BI_DC-  
BI_DB-  
BI_DD+  
BI_DD-  
Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted-pair cable, or at a wiring panel, while not expressly forbidden,  
is beyond the scope of this standard.  
A.2 10/100Mbps, 10/100Base-TX  
When connecting your 10/100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch, a bridge or a hub, a straight or crossover cable is  
necessary. Each port of the Switch supports auto-MDI/MDI-X detection. That means you can directly connect the Switch to any  
Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable. The following table and diagram show the standard RJ-45 receptacle/  
connector and their pin assignments:  
RJ-45 Connector pin assignment  
Contact  
MDI  
MDI-X  
Media Dependant Interface  
Media Dependant  
Interface-Cross  
1
Tx + (transmit)  
Tx - (transmit)  
Rx + (receive)  
Not used  
Rx + (receive)  
2
Rx - (receive)  
3
Tx + (transmit)  
4, 5  
6
Rx - (receive)  
Not used  
Tx - (transmit)  
7, 8  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The standard cable, RJ-45 pin assignment  
The standard RJ-45 receptacle/connector  
There are 8 wires on a standard UTP/STP cable and each wire is color-coded. The following shows the pin allocation and color  
of straight cable and crossover cable connection:  
Straight Cable  
1 2 3  
SIDE 1  
SIDE2  
SIDE 1  
1 = White / Orange  
2 = Orange  
1 = White / Orange  
2 = Orange  
4
5
6
7
8
3 = White / Green  
4 = Blue  
3 = White / Green  
4 = Blue  
5 = White / Blue  
6 = Green  
5 = White / Blue  
6 = Green  
1
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
7 = White / Brown  
8 = Brown  
7 = White / Brown  
8 = Brown  
SIDE 2  
SIDE 1  
Straight Cable  
1 2 3  
SIDE 1  
SIDE2  
1 = White / Orange  
2 = Orange  
1 = White / Orange  
2 = Green  
3 = White / Green  
4 = Blue  
3 = White / Orange  
4 = Blue  
5 = White / Blue  
6 = Green  
5 = White / Blue  
6 = Orange  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7 = White / Brown  
8 = Brown  
7 = White / Brown  
8 = Brown  
SIDE 2  
Figure A-1: Straight-Through and Crossover Cable  
Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables  
into your network.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
APPENDEX B : GLOSSARY  
A
ACE  
ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry. It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID.  
There are three ACE frame types (Ethernet Type, ARP, and IPv4) and two ACE actions (permit and deny). The ACE  
also contains many detailed, different parameter options that are available for individual application.  
ACL  
ACL is an acronym for Access Control List. It is the list table of ACEs, containing access control entries that specify  
individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects, such as a process or a program.  
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL. The privileges determine whether there are specific  
traffic object access rights.  
ACL implementations can be quite complex, for example, when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation. In  
networking, the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server, each with  
a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service. ACL can generally be configured to control inbound  
traffic, and in this context, they are similar to firewalls.  
Aggregation  
Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for  
higher availability.  
(Also Port Aggregation, Link Aggregation).  
ARP  
ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical  
address, such as an Ethernet address. ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet  
address of its neighbors is known. Before using IP, the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet  
address of the desired destination system.  
Auto-Negotiation  
Auto-negotiation is the process where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings  
that can be shared by those devices for a link.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
D
DES  
DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard. It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for  
encrypting (enciphering) and decrypting (deciphering) binary coded information.  
Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher. Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its  
original form called plaintext. The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering  
operations which are based on a binary number called a key.  
DHCP  
DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP  
addresses to devices on a network.  
DHCP used by networked computers (clients) to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default  
gateway, subnet mask, and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server.  
The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique, for example, no IP address is assigned to a second client  
while the first client's assignment is valid (its lease has not expired). Therefore, IP address pool management is done  
by the server and not by a human network administrator.  
Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than  
requiring an administrator to manage the task. This means that a new computer can be added to a network without the  
hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address.  
DNS  
DoS  
DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System. It stores and associates many types of information with domain names.  
Most importantly, DNS translates human-friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer-friendly IP  
addresses. For example, the domain name www.example.com might translate to 192.168.0.1.  
DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service. In a denial-of-service (DoS) attack, an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate  
users from accessing information or services. By targeting at network sites or network connection, an attacker may be  
able to prevent network users from accessing email, web sites, online accounts (banking, etc.), or other services that  
rely on the affected computer.  
Dotted Decimal Notation  
Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators  
between octets.  
An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x.y.z.w, where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255.  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
DSCP  
DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point. It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet  
classification purposes.  
E
Ethernet Type  
Ethernet Type, or EtherType, is a field in the Ethernet MAC header, defined by the Ethernet networking standard. It is  
used to indicate which protocol is being transported in an Ethernet frame.  
F
FTP  
FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)  
and provides file writing and reading. It also provides directory service and security features.  
Fast Leave  
IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding-table entry without  
first sending out group specific queries to the interface. The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the  
multicast group specified in the original leave message. Fast-leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth  
management for all hosts on a switched network, even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously.  
H
HTTP  
HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the  
World Wide Web (WWW).  
HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted, and what actions Web servers and browsers should take  
in response to various commands. For example, when you enter a URL in your browser, this actually sends an HTTP  
command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page. The other main standard that  
controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML, which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed.  
Any Web server machine contains, in addition to the Web page files it can serve, an HTTP daemon, a program that is  
designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive. The Web browser is an HTTP client, sending  
requests to server machines. An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)  
connection to a particular port on a remote host (port 80 by default). An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the  
client to send a request message.  
HTTPS  
HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer. It is used to indicate a secure HTTP  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
connection.  
HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for  
security-sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons.  
HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape's Secure Socket Layer (SSL) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP  
application layering. (HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer, TCP/IP.)  
SSL uses a 40-bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree of  
encryption for commercial exchange.  
I
ICMP  
ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol. It is a protocol that generated the error response,  
diagnostic or routing purposes. ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple  
exchanges such as time-stamp or echo transactions. For example, the PING command uses ICMP to test an Internet  
connection.  
IEEE 802.1X  
IEEE 802.1X is an IEEE standard for port-based Network Access Control. It provides authentication to devices  
attached to a LAN port, establishing a point-to-point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication  
fails. With 802.1X, access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized  
users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.  
IGMP  
IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communications protocol used to manage the  
membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish  
multicast group memberships. It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification, like ICMP for unicast connections.  
IGMP can be used for online video and gaming, and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these  
uses.  
IGMP Querier  
A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link. This router is called the Querier.  
IMAP  
IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages  
from a mail server.  
IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers, and SMTP is the protocol used to  
transport mail to an IMAP server.  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4. It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3  
(POP3), but offers additional and more complex features. For example, the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email  
messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer. If you wish to remove your messages from  
the server, you must use your mail client to generate local folders, copy messages to your local hard drive, and then  
delete and expunge the messages from the server.  
IP  
IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol. It is a protocol used for communicating data across a internet network.  
IP is a "best effort" system, which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in  
the same condition it was sent. Each device connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) or Wide Area Network (WAN) is  
given an Internet Protocol address, and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices  
connected to the extended network.  
The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4, which has 32-bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in  
excess of four billion unique addresses. This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking  
addresses in large blocks, the bulk of which remain unused. There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new  
version of the Internet Protocol, IPv6, which would have 128-bits Internet Protocol addresses. This number can be  
represented roughly by a three with thirty-nine zeroes after it. However, IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of  
the Internet.  
IPMC  
IPMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast.  
L
LACP  
LACP is an IEEE 802.3ad standard protocol. The Link Aggregation Control Protocol, allows bundling several physical  
ports together to form a single logical port.  
LLDP  
LLDP is an IEEE 802.1ab standard protocol. The Link Layer Discovery Protocol, is used for network discovery, and  
works by having the units in the network exchanging information with their neighbors using LLDP frames.  
M
MAC Table  
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds up a table that maps  
MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to ( based upon the DMAC address in  
the frame ). This table contains both static and dynamic entries. The static entries are configured by the network  
administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
The frames also contain a MAC address ( SMAC address ), which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending  
the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC  
addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have  
been seen after a configurable age time.  
MD5  
MD5 is an acronym for Message-Digest algorithm 5. MD5 is a message digest algorithm, used cryptographic hash  
function with a 128-bit hash value. It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991. MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 - The  
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm.  
Mirroring  
For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic, the switch system can be configured to mirror frames  
from multiple ports to a mirror port. (In this context, mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame.)  
Both incoming (source) and outgoing (destination) frames can be mirrored to the mirror port.  
N
NetBIOS  
NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input/Output System. It is a program that allows applications on separate  
computers to communicate within a Local Area Network (LAN), and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network (WAN).  
The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a  
different host name, provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)  
model.  
NFS  
NFS is an acronym for Network File System. It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as  
though they are local file systems.  
NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network, providing authorized users  
continuous access to them, which means NFS supports sharing of files, printers, and other resources as persistent  
storage over a computer network.  
O
Optional TLVs.  
A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs  
For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame. These TLVs are known as  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
optional TLVs. If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame.  
P
PING  
ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to  
generate a response from that computer. The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the  
packets. Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected.  
ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packets. The PING Request is the packet from the origin  
computer, and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target.  
Policer  
POP3  
A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames. It is located in front of the ingress queue.  
POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3. It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from  
a mail server.  
POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it. However, some  
implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time. POP can be  
thought of as a "store-and-forward" service.  
An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP). IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for  
retaining e-mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server. IMAP can be thought of as a remote file  
server.  
POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e-mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol  
(SMTP). You send e-mail with SMTP, and a mail handler receives it on your recipient's behalf. Then the mail is read  
using POP or IMAP. IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e-mail retrieval.  
Virtually all modern e-mail clients and servers support both.  
Private VLAN  
In a private VLAN, communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted. A VLAN can be configured as a  
private VLAN.  
Q
QCE  
QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry. It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID.  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
There are six QCE frame types: Ethernet Type, VLAN, UDP/TCP Port, DSCP, TOS, and Tag Priority. Frames can be  
classified by one of 4 different QoS classes: "Low", "Normal", "Medium", and "High" for individual application.  
QCL  
QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List. It is the list table of QCEs, containing QoS control entries that classify to a  
specific QoS class on specific traffic objects.  
Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL. The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific  
QoS class.  
QoS  
QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service. It is a method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual  
applications or protocols.  
A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data, including high-quality video and  
delay-sensitive data such as real-time voice. Networks must provide secure, predictable, measurable, and sometimes  
guaranteed services.  
Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end-to-end business solution. Therefore, QoS is the  
set of techniques to manage network resources.  
R
RARP  
RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol. It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a  
given hardware address, such as an Ethernet address. RARP is the complement of ARP.  
Router Port  
A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device.  
RSTP  
In 1998, the IEEE with document 802.1w introduced an evolution of STP: the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, which  
provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. Standard IEEE 802.1D-2004 now incorporates  
RSTP and obsoletes STP, while at the same time being backwards-compatible with STP.  
S
SAMBA  
Samba is a program running under UNIX-like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and  
Microsoft Windows machines. Samba acts as file and print servers for Microsoft Windows, IBM OS/2, and other SMB  
client machines. Samba uses the Server Message Block (SMB) protocol and Common Internet File System (CIFS),  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking.  
Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms, including Linux, most common Unix platforms,  
OpenVMS, and IBM OS/2.  
Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in  
Microsoft Windows "Neighborhood Network".  
SHA  
SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm. It designed by the National Security Agency (NSA) and published by  
the NIST as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Standard. Hash algorithms compute a fixed-length digital  
representation (known as a message digest) of an input data sequence (the message) of any length.  
Shaper  
SMTP  
A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames. It is located after the ingress queues.  
SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It is a text-based protocol that uses the Transmission Control  
Protocol (TCP) and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service. SMTP transfers mail messages  
between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail.  
SNMP  
SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol. It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet  
Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol for network management. SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in a network  
management architecture. It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or  
change notices from network devices implementing SNMP.  
SNTP  
SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol, a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer  
systems. SNTP uses UDP (datagrams) as transport layer.  
SPROUT  
Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology. An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology  
changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch. SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each  
switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack.  
STP  
Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer-2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN. The  
original STP protocol is now obsoleted by RSTP.  
Switch ID  
Switch IDs (1-16) are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack. The Switch ID of each switch is shown on  
the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands.  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
T
Tag Priority  
Tag Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.  
TCP  
TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol  
(IP) to exchange the messages between computers.  
The TCP protocol guarantees reliable and in-order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for  
multiple connections by concurrent applications (for example, Web server and e-mail server) running on the same  
host.  
The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another. It is known as a  
connection-oriented protocol, which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the  
message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged. TCP is  
responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets  
back into the complete message at the other end.  
Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, and File Transfer Protocol  
(FTP).  
TELNET  
TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork. It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control  
Protocol (TCP) and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client.  
TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network. To start a Telnet  
session, the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password. Then, the client user can  
enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console.  
TFTP  
ToS  
TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol. It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP)  
and provides file writing and reading, but it does not provides directory service and security features.  
ToS is an acronym for Type of Service. It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control. It is fully decoded to  
determine the priority from the 6-bit ToS field in the IP header. The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully  
decoded into 64 possibilities, and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4  
ToS priority control bit (0~63).  
TLV  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
A LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information. Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV (TLV is  
short for "Type Length Value").  
U
UDP  
UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol. It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol (IP) to  
exchange the messages between computers.  
UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) that uses the Internet Protocol (IP). Unlike TCP, UDP  
does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams, and UDP doesn't provide reassembling and  
sequencing of the packets. This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the  
entire message has arrived and is in the right order. Network applications that want to save processing time because  
they have very small data units to exchange may prefer UDP to TCP.  
UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer. It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user  
requests and, optionally, a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact.  
Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System (DNS), streaming media applications  
such as IPTV, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).  
User Priority  
User Priority is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for the 802.1Q frame.  
V
VLAN  
Virtual LAN. A method to restrict communication between switch ports. VLANs can be used for the following  
applications:  
VLAN unaware switching: This is the default configuration. All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and  
members of VLAN 1. This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1, and the switch does not remove or  
insert VLAN tags.  
VLAN aware switching: This is based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. All ports are VLAN aware. Ports connected to  
VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames. Other ports are members of one  
VLAN, set up with this Port VLAN ID, and transmit untagged frames.  
Provider switching: This is also known as Q-in-Q switching. Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware,  
members of one VLAN, and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID. Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN  
aware, members of multiple VLANs, and set up to tag all frames. Untagged frames received on a subscriber port are  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User’s Manual of WGSW-24040 / WGSW-24040R  
SGSW-24040 / SGSW-24040R  
forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag. Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to  
the provider port with a double VLAN tag.  
VLAN ID  
VLAN ID is a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pelco Switch S66X User Manual
Philips Baby Monitor SCD505 User Manual
Philips Cordless Telephone CD5351S User Manual
Philips DVR MCD2010 User Manual
Philips Smoke Alarm SCB4330CB User Manual
Philips TV Antenna SDW1410GN User Manual
Pioneer Planer PNR 14 150 User Manual
Polaroid Flat Panel Television LCD 1550 User Manual
Premium Home Creations Swimming Pool K 2369 User Manual
PYLE Audio DVD Player PLDVD48 User Manual